WO2022082794A1 - 用于寻呼的方法和装置 - Google Patents

用于寻呼的方法和装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022082794A1
WO2022082794A1 PCT/CN2020/123444 CN2020123444W WO2022082794A1 WO 2022082794 A1 WO2022082794 A1 WO 2022082794A1 CN 2020123444 W CN2020123444 W CN 2020123444W WO 2022082794 A1 WO2022082794 A1 WO 2022082794A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
paging
group number
grouping
terminal device
page
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/123444
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
谢曦
常俊仁
邝奕如
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to CN202080101928.2A priority Critical patent/CN115699925A/zh
Priority to PCT/CN2020/123444 priority patent/WO2022082794A1/zh
Priority to EP20958376.4A priority patent/EP4221382A4/en
Publication of WO2022082794A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022082794A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
    • H04W68/02—Arrangements for increasing efficiency of notification or paging channel
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0212—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managed by the network, e.g. network or access point is master and terminal is slave
    • H04W52/0216—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managed by the network, e.g. network or access point is master and terminal is slave using a pre-established activity schedule, e.g. traffic indication frame
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0212—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managed by the network, e.g. network or access point is master and terminal is slave
    • H04W52/0219—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managed by the network, e.g. network or access point is master and terminal is slave where the power saving management affects multiple terminals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0225—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal
    • H04W52/0229—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal where the received signal is a wanted signal
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0225—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal
    • H04W52/0235—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal where the received signal is a power saving command
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0261—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managing power supply demand, e.g. depending on battery level
    • H04W52/0274—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managing power supply demand, e.g. depending on battery level by switching on or off the equipment or parts thereof
    • H04W52/028—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managing power supply demand, e.g. depending on battery level by switching on or off the equipment or parts thereof switching on or off only a part of the equipment circuit blocks
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/27—Transitions between radio resource control [RRC] states
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and more particularly, to a method and apparatus for paging.
  • the network can notify the User Equipment (UE) to receive the paging message through paging; or, the network can send a short message to the UE through paging to indicate system information update or earthquake and tsunami warning/commercial mobile warning.
  • UE User Equipment
  • the user equipment calculates its own paging occasion (Paging Occasion, PO) position according to the UE identification information and paging-related parameters, and monitors the PO in each paging cycle to determine whether the network has performed paging.
  • Paging Occasion Paging Occasion
  • the present application provides a method and an apparatus for paging, which can try to prevent irrelevant terminal equipment from repeatedly receiving the same paging, thereby reducing unnecessary power consumption and reducing false alarms of paging.
  • a paging method including: receiving first indication information, where the first indication message is used to determine a type of a first paging, where the type of the first paging includes: non-repetitive paging or Repeat paging; determine the type of the first paging according to the first indication information; determine whether to receive or not to receive the first paging according to the type of the first paging.
  • the terminal device by receiving the first indication information sent by the network device by the terminal device, the terminal device can determine the type of the first paging. The terminal device can then determine whether to receive the first paging or not to receive the first paging according to the situation of receiving the paging before. Only when it is ensured that the terminal device has not received the paging, the terminal device receives the first paging, so it does not need to repeatedly receive the same paging every time, thereby reducing unnecessary paging The extra power consumption caused by reception reduces paging false alarms.
  • the first indication information is carried in a reference signal.
  • the indication information may be carried in downlink control information (Downlink Control Information, DCI), physical layer signal/sequence (sequence), media access control (Media Access Control, MAC) control element (Control Element, CE), or radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) message, etc.
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • MAC media access control
  • CE Control Element
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the specific bearer signaling or message may be a wake up signal (Wake Up Signal, WUS), a paging DCI, a paging message, and the like.
  • the first indication information can be sent to the terminal device by using sufficiently existing signaling such as DCI, MAC CE, or RRC.
  • the repeated paging satisfies:
  • the first page is a repeated page
  • the second page is a page sent before the first page
  • the terminal device of the first page belongs to the terminal device of the second page
  • the first page is a repeated page
  • the second page is a page sent before the first page
  • the determining whether to receive or not to receive the first paging according to the type of the first paging includes:
  • the type of the first paging is non-repetitive paging, receiving the first paging; or,
  • the first paging is not received.
  • the determining whether to receive or not to receive the first paging according to the type of the first paging further includes:
  • the first paging is received; or,
  • the first paging is not received.
  • the unreceived paging before the first paging includes:
  • the paging has been received before the first paging includes:
  • a paging has been received within a first time before the first paging and/or on the serving cell currently camped on; or,
  • the determining whether to receive or not to receive the first paging according to the first paging type further includes:
  • the first indication information of the first paging is different from the first indication information received last time, it is determined that the type of the first paging is non-repetitive paging, and the first paging is received; or,
  • the first indication information of the first paging is the same as the first indication information received last time, it is determined that the type of the first paging is repeated paging, and the first paging is not received.
  • the method further includes:
  • the wake-up signal WUS being used to determine whether to receive or not to receive the first paging
  • the terminal device can determine the type of the first paging by receiving the first indication information sent by the network device. The terminal device can then determine whether to receive the first paging or not to receive the first paging according to the situation of receiving the paging before. It is only ensured that the terminal device receives the first paging when it has not received the paging, instead of repeatedly receiving the same paging indiscriminately every time, thereby reducing the extra cost caused by unnecessary paging receptions Power consumption and reduce paging false alarms.
  • a paging method including: the network device determines the type of the first paging, and then sends first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to determine the type of the first paging,
  • the types of the first paging include: non-repeated paging or repeated paging.
  • the first indication information is sent to the terminal device through the network device, indicating the type of the first paging.
  • the terminal device determines the type of the first paging, and then can determine whether to receive the first paging or not to receive the first paging according to the situation of receiving the paging before.
  • the terminal device only receives the first paging when it is ensured that the terminal device has not received the paging, and does not need to repeatedly receive the paging every time, so as to reduce unnecessary paging reception. Additional power consumption reduces paging false alarms.
  • the first indication information is carried in a reference signal.
  • the indication information may be carried in downlink control information DCI, physical layer signal/sequence, MAC CE, or infinite Resource control RRC messages, etc.
  • the specific bearer signaling or message may be a wake-up signal WUS, a paging DCI, a paging message, and the like.
  • the first indication information can be sent to the terminal device by using sufficiently existing signaling such as DCI, MAC CE, or RRC.
  • the repeated paging satisfies:
  • the first page is a repeated page
  • the second page is a page sent before the first page
  • the terminal device of the first page belongs to the terminal device of the second page
  • the first page is a repeated page
  • the second page is a page sent before the first page
  • the sending the first indication information includes:
  • the first paging type is non-repetitive paging
  • send the first indication information where the first indication information is used to determine that the first paging type is non-repetitive paging
  • the first indication information is sent, where the first indication information is used to determine that the type of the first paging is repeated paging.
  • the sending the first indication information further includes:
  • the same first indication information is sent, where the first indication information is used to determine the type of the first page, and the first page is any one of the multiple pages paging.
  • the terminal device can determine the type of the first paging by receiving the first indication information sent by the network device. The terminal device can then determine whether to receive the first paging or not to receive the first paging according to the situation of receiving the paging before. Paging is received repeatedly without distinction every time, thereby reducing extra power consumption caused by unnecessary paging reception and reducing paging false alarms.
  • a communication method including: a terminal device determining first information, where the first information includes: identification information of one or more cells where the terminal device resides/visits and second information, the second information The information is staying probability information of the terminal equipment on one or more cells where it camps/visits; the terminal equipment sends the first information.
  • the terminal equipment reports the cell information on which it resides or visits, including cell identification information, staying probability information on one or more cells, and specific time information. Based on the camping/visiting cell information reported by the terminal equipment, the network equipment can determine the (current) cell where the terminal equipment may or has a high probability of staying when it needs to initiate paging to the terminal equipment. Initiating paging in one or more cells that are likely to stay.
  • the paging range is optimized, making paging more accurate, avoiding paging in an excessively large range, and reducing the impact on irrelevant terminal equipment; on the other hand On the one hand, it also improves the success probability of paging the terminal device, and tries to avoid the situation that the terminal device needs to be paged multiple times in different ranges.
  • the first information includes:
  • the staying probability information of the terminal device on one or more cells; or,
  • the sending the first information includes: sending the first information to the core network and/or the radio access network.
  • the terminal equipment reports the first information of the camped or visited cell to assist the network equipment in determining or optimizing the paging range.
  • the (current) cell where the terminal equipment may or has a high probability to stay can be determined, so that the paging can be initiated preferentially in one or more cells where the terminal equipment may or has a high probability of staying.
  • the paging range is optimized to make paging more accurate, avoiding paging in an excessively large range, which can reduce the impact on irrelevant terminal equipment; on the other hand, it also improves the success probability of paging the terminal equipment. , try to avoid the situation that the terminal equipment needs to be paged multiple times in different ranges.
  • a communication method comprising: a network device receiving first information sent by a terminal device, where the first information includes: identification information of one or more cells that the terminal device resides on/visits and second information, The second information is the staying probability information of the terminal equipment on one or more cells that are camped on/visited; the first information is used by the network equipment to determine the paging range; the network equipment determines the terminal equipment according to the first information paging range.
  • the network device can determine the paging range based on the first information reported by the terminal device, including cell identification information, corresponding stay probability of the cell, and specific time information.
  • the (current) cell where the terminal equipment may or has a high probability to stay can be determined, so that the paging can be initiated preferentially in one or more cells where the terminal equipment may or has a high probability of staying,
  • the paging range is optimized to make paging more accurate, avoiding paging in an excessively large range, which can reduce the impact on irrelevant terminal equipment; on the other hand, it also improves the success probability of paging the terminal equipment. , try to avoid the situation that the terminal equipment needs to be paged multiple times in different ranges.
  • the first information includes:
  • One or more cell identification information that has been camped on/visited, and/or information of the probability of staying in one or more cells that have been camped on/visited are included in one or more cells that have been camped on/visited.
  • the first information includes:
  • the staying probability information of the terminal device on one or more cells; or,
  • the determining the paging range according to the first information includes:
  • the core network determines a paging range according to the first information; or,
  • the access network determines a paging range according to the first information; or,
  • the core network If the core network receives the first information and the access network sends the paging, the core network sends the terminal equipment data and the first information to the last serving gNB of the terminal equipment, The last serving gNB determines the paging range according to the first information.
  • the network device can determine the paging range based on the first information reported by the terminal device, including cell identification information, corresponding staying probability of the cell, and specific time information.
  • the (current) cell where the terminal equipment may or has a high probability to stay can be determined, so that the paging can be initiated preferentially in one or more cells where the terminal equipment may or has a high probability of staying,
  • the paging range is optimized to make paging more accurate, avoiding paging in an excessively large range, which can reduce the impact on irrelevant terminal equipment; on the other hand, it also improves the success probability of paging the terminal equipment. , try to avoid the situation that the terminal equipment needs to be paged multiple times in different ranges.
  • a fifth aspect provides a method for paging, comprising: a terminal device receiving a first grouping parameter sent by a network device, where the first grouping parameter is used to determine a radio resource control idle state RRC_IDLE terminal device and/or a radio resource The grouping group number of the terminal equipment in the inactive state RRC_INACTIVE is controlled; the terminal equipment determines the grouping group number according to the first grouping parameter, and the grouping group number is used for the network equipment to send paging.
  • the terminal device by receiving the first grouping parameter sent by the network device, the terminal device can divide the group number range of the idle UE and the inactive UE, or configure the group number offset for the idle UE or the inactive UE, so as to realize the idle UE and the inactive UE.
  • the inactive UE and the inactive UE are divided into different UE groups, that is, it is ensured that the idle UE and the inactive UE are not in the same group.
  • the network device will not initiate RAN paging to the idle UE but may only initiate CN paging, but the network device may initiate RAN paging or CN paging to the inactive UE, dividing the idle UE and the inactive UE into different groups , which can prevent the idle UE from receiving RAN paging unnecessarily when the network initiates RAN paging to the inactive UE.
  • the probability of the network device initiating paging to the inactive UE may be higher than the probability of initiating paging to the idle UE. Dividing the idle UE and the inactive UE into different groups can avoid the frequent paging of the inactive UE by the network device. The paging effect idle UE frequently performs unnecessary paging reception.
  • the first grouping parameter includes:
  • the group number range includes a first group number range and/or a second group number range, the first group number range is the group number range of the RRC_IDLE terminal device, and the second group number range is the group number of the RRC_INACTIVE terminal device scope;
  • the group number offset includes the first group number offset and/or the second group number offset, the first group number offset is the group number offset of the RRC_IDLE terminal device, the second group number offset The group number offset is the group number offset of the RRC_INACTIVE end device.
  • the receiving the first grouping parameter includes:
  • the terminal device receives the first grouping parameter from a broadcast message; or,
  • the terminal device receives the first grouping parameter from a radio resource control RRC message.
  • the determining the grouping group number of the terminal device according to the first grouping parameter includes:
  • the RRC_IDLE terminal device determines the grouping group number according to the first group number range or the first group number offset; or,
  • the RRC_INACTIVE terminal device determines the group number according to the second group number range or the second offset of the group number.
  • the terminal equipment RRC_IDLE UE and RRC_INACTIVE UE in different RRC states are grouped to reduce unnecessary paging reception of unrelated terminal equipment.
  • the first grouping parameter sent by the network device to the terminal device the range of the group numbers used by the idle UE and the inactive UE can be divided, or the group number offset can be configured for the idle UE or the inactive UE, so that the idle UE and the inactive UE can be divided into In different UE groups, it is ensured that the idle UE and the inactive UE are not in the same group.
  • the network device will not initiate RAN paging to the idle UE but may only initiate CN paging, but the network device may initiate RAN paging or CN paging to the inactive UE, dividing the idle UE and the inactive UE into different groups , which can prevent the idle UE from receiving RAN paging unnecessarily when the network initiates RAN paging to the inactive UE.
  • the probability of the network device initiating paging to the inactive UE may be higher than the probability of initiating paging to the idle UE. Dividing the idle UE and the inactive UE into different groups can avoid the frequent paging of the inactive UE by the network device. The paging effect idle UE frequently performs unnecessary paging reception.
  • a method for paging comprising: sending a first grouping parameter, where the first grouping parameter is used to determine a radio resource control idle state RRC_IDLE terminal device and/or a radio resource control inactive state RRC_INACTIVE terminal
  • the grouping group number of the device, the grouping group number is used by the network device to send paging.
  • the idle UE and the inactive UE can be divided into different UE groups. , that is, to ensure that the idle UE and the inactive UE are not in the same group.
  • the network will not initiate RAN paging for idle UEs but may only initiate CN paging, but the network may initiate RAN paging or CN paging for inactive UEs. Avoid unnecessary UE receiving RAN paging when the network initiates RAN paging to the inactive UE.
  • the probability of the network initiating paging to the inactive UE may be higher than the probability of initiating paging to the idle UE. Dividing the idle UE and the inactive UE into different groups can avoid the impact of the network on the frequent paging of the inactive UE. Idle UE frequently does unnecessary paging reception.
  • the first grouping parameter includes:
  • the group number range includes a first group number range and/or a second group number range, the first group number range is the group number range of the RRC_IDLE terminal device, and the second group number range is the group number of the RRC_INACTIVE terminal device scope;
  • the group number offset includes the first group number offset and/or the second group number offset, the first group number offset is the group number offset of the RRC_IDLE terminal device, the second group number offset The group number offset is the group number offset of the RRC_INACTIVE end device.
  • the sending the first grouping parameter includes: the network device broadcasts the first grouping parameter to the terminal device; or,
  • the network device sends the first grouping parameter to the terminal device through a radio resource control RRC message.
  • the terminal equipment RRC_IDLE UE and RRC_INACTIVE UE in different RRC states are grouped to reduce unnecessary paging reception of unrelated terminal equipment.
  • the range of the group numbers used by the idle UE and the inactive UE can be divided, or the method of configuring the group number offset for the idle UE or the inactive UE can realize the combination of the idle UE and the inactive UE. Divided into different UE groups, that is, to ensure that idle UEs and inactive UEs are not in the same group.
  • the network device will not initiate RAN paging to the idle UE but may only initiate CN paging, but the network device may initiate RAN paging or CN paging to the inactive UE, dividing the idle UE and the inactive UE into different groups , which can prevent the idle UE from receiving RAN paging unnecessarily when the network initiates RAN paging to the inactive UE.
  • the probability of the network device initiating paging to the inactive UE may be higher than the probability of initiating paging to the idle UE. Dividing the idle UE and the inactive UE into different groups can avoid the frequent paging of the inactive UE by the network device. The paging effect idle UE frequently performs unnecessary paging reception.
  • a method for paging comprising: a terminal device sending a second grouping parameter to a core network device or an access network device, where the second grouping parameter is used to determine a grouping group number of the terminal device; the terminal The device receives the fourth grouping parameter sent by the access network device, and the fourth grouping parameter is used by the terminal device to determine the grouping group number; the terminal device determines the group number of the terminal device according to the second grouping parameter and the fourth grouping parameter Grouping group number; the grouping group number is used by the network device to send the grouping group number.
  • terminal equipment and core network equipment negotiate information related to terminal equipment grouping according to the characteristics of the terminal equipment, so that terminal equipment with the same or similar characteristics can be grouped into the same group.
  • the terminal devices may be grouped according to the service characteristics of the terminal devices, and the terminal devices with the same/similar service types or service requirements are grouped into the same group.
  • this grouping method can try to ensure that the terminal equipment to be paged this time belongs to the same group when a certain service or a certain type of service arrives.
  • the probability of unrelated terminal equipment being paged is reduced.
  • the terminal equipment can also be grouped according to the mobility characteristics, and the terminal equipment with the same or similar mobility status or speed can be grouped into the same group. Considering that the terminal equipment with high mobility or high speed has a higher probability of changing the camping cell in practice , the probability that the network device needs to page the terminal device in a large range is correspondingly large, and the probability that the terminal device with low mobility or low speed stays in a small range is high, and the network device only needs to be in a small range. The probability of paging the terminal equipment within the range is also relatively large. This grouping method can try to avoid the network paging the terminal equipment with high mobility or high speed. paging.
  • the second grouping parameter includes: a parameter related to the service of the terminal device, for example, a service requirement level of the terminal device.
  • the second grouping parameter is a quality of service parameter based on the service of the terminal device, and/or the service type of the terminal device, and/or the service type of the terminal device. Mobility state or speed determined.
  • the receiving the fourth grouping parameter includes:
  • the terminal device receives the first grouping parameter from a message broadcast by the access network device; or,
  • the terminal device receives the first grouping parameter sent by the access network device through the radio resource control RRC message.
  • the method further includes:
  • the core network device does not receive the second grouping parameter sent by the terminal device, send the updated second grouping parameter; or,
  • the updated second grouping parameter sent by the core network device is received, where the second grouping parameter is used by the terminal device to determine the grouping group number.
  • the method further includes:
  • a second grouping parameter sent by the core network device is received, where the second grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • the grouping of terminal equipment is realized by distinguishing the characteristics of different terminal equipment, so as to reduce the probability of the terminal equipment receiving unnecessary paging, the terminal equipment can be grouped according to the service characteristics of the terminal equipment, and the service type or service requirement can be grouped. Identical/similar terminal equipments are grouped into the same group. Considering that in practice, terminal equipments with similar services are more likely to be paged at the same time, this grouping method can try to ensure the The second paged terminal equipment belongs to the same group, thereby reducing the probability of unrelated terminal equipment being paged.
  • the terminal equipment can also be grouped according to the mobility characteristics, and the terminal equipment with the same or similar mobility status or speed can be grouped into the same group.
  • the probability that the network device needs to page the terminal device in a large range is correspondingly large, and the probability that the terminal device with low mobility or low speed stays in a small range is high, and the network device only needs to be in a small range.
  • the probability of paging the terminal equipment within the range is also relatively large. This grouping method can try to avoid the network paging the terminal equipment with high mobility or high speed. paging.
  • a method for paging comprising: a core network device receiving a second grouping parameter sent by a terminal device, where the second grouping parameter is used to determine a grouping group number of the terminal device;
  • the network access device sends the second grouping parameter and the third grouping parameter, the third grouping parameter is used to determine the fourth grouping parameter, the fourth grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device, and the grouping group The number is used for the network device to send paging.
  • terminal equipment and core network equipment negotiate information related to terminal equipment grouping according to the characteristics of the terminal equipment, so that terminal equipment with the same or similar characteristics can be grouped into the same group.
  • the terminal equipment can be grouped according to the service characteristics of the terminal equipment, and the terminal equipment with the same/similar service type or service requirements can be grouped into the same group.
  • This grouping method can try to ensure that the terminal equipment to be paged this time belongs to the same group when a certain service or a certain type of service arrives, thereby reducing the probability of unrelated terminal equipment being paged.
  • the terminal equipment can also be grouped according to the mobility characteristics, and the terminal equipment with the same or similar mobility status or speed can be grouped into the same group.
  • the probability that the network device needs to page the terminal device in a large range is correspondingly large, and the probability that the terminal device with low mobility or low speed stays in a small range is high, and the network device only needs to be in a small range.
  • the probability of paging the terminal equipment within the range is also relatively large. This grouping method can try to avoid the network paging the terminal equipment with high mobility or high speed. paging.
  • the second grouping parameter includes: a parameter related to the service of the terminal device.
  • the second grouping parameter is a quality of service parameter based on the service of the terminal device, and/or the service type of the terminal device, and/or the service type of the terminal device. Mobility state or speed determined.
  • the method further includes:
  • the updated second grouping parameter is sent, where the updated second grouping parameter is determined according to the second grouping parameter sent by the terminal device, and the second grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • the method further includes:
  • the second grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device
  • the second grouping parameter is sent to the terminal device.
  • the grouping of terminal equipment is realized by distinguishing the characteristics of different terminal equipment, so as to reduce the probability of the terminal equipment receiving unnecessary paging, the terminal equipment can be grouped according to the service characteristics of the terminal equipment, and the service type or service requirement can be grouped. Identical/similar terminal equipments are grouped into the same group. Considering that in practice, terminal equipments with similar services are more likely to be paged at the same time, this grouping method can try to ensure the The second paged terminal equipment belongs to the same group, thereby reducing the probability of unrelated terminal equipment being paged.
  • the terminal equipment can also be grouped according to the mobility characteristics, and the terminal equipment with the same or similar mobility status or speed can be grouped into the same group.
  • the probability that the network device needs to page the terminal device in a large range is correspondingly large, and the probability that the terminal device with low mobility or low speed stays in a small range is high, and the network device only needs to be in a small range.
  • the probability of paging the terminal equipment within the range is also relatively large. This grouping method can try to avoid the network paging the terminal equipment with high mobility or high speed. paging.
  • a ninth aspect provides a method for paging, comprising: an access network device receiving a second grouping parameter sent by a core network device or a terminal device, where the second grouping parameter is used to determine a grouping group number of the terminal device;
  • the access network device receives the third grouping parameter sent by the core network device, where the third grouping parameter is used to determine the fourth grouping parameter; the access network device determines the fourth grouping parameter according to the third grouping parameter; access The network equipment sends the fourth grouping parameter to the terminal equipment, where the fourth grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal equipment; the access network equipment determines the terminal equipment according to the second grouping parameter and the fourth grouping parameter
  • the grouping group number is used for the network device to send paging.
  • terminal equipment and core network equipment negotiate information related to terminal equipment grouping according to the characteristics of the terminal equipment, so that terminal equipment with the same or similar characteristics can be grouped into the same group.
  • the terminal equipment can be grouped according to the service characteristics of the terminal equipment, and the terminal equipment with the same/similar service type or service requirements can be grouped into the same group.
  • This grouping method can try to ensure that the terminal equipment to be paged this time belongs to the same group when a certain service or a certain type of service arrives, thereby reducing the probability of unrelated terminal equipment being paged.
  • the terminal equipment can also be grouped according to the mobility characteristics, and the terminal equipment with the same or similar mobility status or speed can be grouped into the same group.
  • the probability that the network device needs to page the terminal device in a large range is correspondingly large, and the probability that the terminal device with low mobility or low speed stays in a small range is high, and the network device only needs to be in a small range.
  • the probability of paging the terminal equipment within the range is also relatively large. This grouping method can try to avoid the network paging the terminal equipment with high mobility or high speed. paging.
  • the second grouping parameter includes: a parameter related to the service of the terminal device.
  • the second grouping parameter is a quality of service parameter based on the service of the terminal device, and/or the service type of the terminal device, and/or the service type of the terminal device. Mobility state or speed determined.
  • the sending the fourth grouping parameter to the terminal device includes:
  • the access network device broadcasts the fourth grouping parameter to the terminal device; or,
  • the access network device sends the fourth grouping parameter to the terminal device through a radio resource control RRC message.
  • the grouping of terminal equipment is realized by distinguishing the characteristics of different terminal equipment, so as to reduce the probability of the terminal equipment receiving unnecessary paging, the terminal equipment can be grouped according to the service characteristics of the terminal equipment, and the service type or service requirement can be grouped. Identical/similar terminal equipments are grouped into the same group. Considering that in practice, terminal equipments with similar services are more likely to be paged at the same time, this grouping method can try to ensure the The second paged terminal equipment belongs to the same group, thereby reducing the probability of unrelated terminal equipment being paged.
  • the terminal equipment can also be grouped according to the mobility characteristics, and the terminal equipment with the same or similar mobility status or speed can be grouped into the same group.
  • the probability that the network device needs to page the terminal device in a large range is correspondingly large, and the probability that the terminal device with low mobility or low speed stays in a small range is high, and the network device only needs to be in a small range.
  • the probability of paging the terminal equipment within the range is also relatively large. This grouping method can try to avoid the network paging the terminal equipment with high mobility or high speed. paging.
  • a communication apparatus comprising a unit for performing each step of the communication method in any one of the first to ninth aspects and implementations thereof.
  • the communication device is a communication chip
  • the communication chip may include an input circuit or interface for sending information or data, and an output circuit or interface for receiving information or data.
  • the communication device is a communication device (for example, a terminal device, a P-CSCF device or a gateway device, etc.), and the communication chip may include a transmitter for sending information or data, and a transmitter for receiving information or data receiver.
  • the communication chip may include a transmitter for sending information or data, and a transmitter for receiving information or data receiver.
  • a communication device including a processor, and a memory, where the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device executes the first aspect to the A communication method in any one of the ninth aspects and various possible implementations thereof.
  • processors there are one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory may be provided separately from the processor.
  • the forwarding device further includes a transmitter (transmitter) and a receiver (receiver).
  • a twelfth aspect provides a communication system, the above-mentioned terminal device and network device.
  • a thirteenth aspect provides a computer program product, the computer program product comprising: a computer program (also referred to as code, or instructions), which, when the computer program is executed, causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned first aspect to The method in any possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect.
  • a computer program also referred to as code, or instructions
  • a computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also referred to as code, or instruction) when it runs on a computer, causing the computer to execute the above-mentioned first aspect to The method in any possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect.
  • a computer program also referred to as code, or instruction
  • a chip system including a memory and a processor, where the memory is used for storing a computer program, and the processor is used for calling and running the computer program from the memory, so that a communication device installed with the chip system executes the The method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the ninth aspect.
  • the chip system may include an input circuit or interface for sending information or data, and an output circuit or interface for receiving information or data.
  • the terminal equipment reports the camping or visiting cell by distinguishing whether the paging is a new paging or repeated paging.
  • the four ways to optimize the staying probability information of the terminal equipment distinguish the terminal equipment in different RRC states in paging, and realize the grouping of terminal equipment according to the characteristics of different terminal equipment to reduce the probability of the terminal equipment receiving unnecessary paging. Determination and selection of paging objects reduce the impact of paging on unrelated terminal equipment, thereby reducing paging false alarms and avoiding unnecessary UE power consumption as much as possible.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a system to which an embodiment of the present application is applied.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a paging scenario to which this embodiment of the present application is applicable.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a paging process to which this embodiment of the present application is applicable.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of an example of a method for paging according to the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of another example of a method for paging according to the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of another example of a method for paging according to the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of another example of a method for paging according to the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of another example of a method for paging according to the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of another example of a method for paging according to the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic block diagram of an example of a paging apparatus applicable to the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic block diagram of another example of a paging apparatus applicable to the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic block diagram of an example of a terminal device applicable to the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic block diagram of another example of a network device suitable for the present application.
  • GSM Global System of Mobile communication
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • GPRS General Packet Radio Service
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • FDD Frequency Division Duplex
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
  • WiMAX Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access
  • V2V Vehicle to Vehicle
  • V2I Vehicle to Infrastructure
  • V2P Vehicle to Pedestrian
  • V2N Vehicle to Network
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a system to which an embodiment of the present application is applied.
  • the system 100 may include a network device 110 and terminal devices 120 and 130, wherein the network device and the terminal devices are connected by wireless.
  • FIG. 1 only takes the system including one network device as an example for description, but the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this.
  • the system may also include more network devices; similarly, the system may also include more terminals equipment.
  • the system may also be referred to as a network, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 110 in this embodiment of the present application may be a device for paging with terminal devices, and the network device may be a global mobile communication (GSM Global System of Mobile communication, GSM) or a code division multiple access (Code Division Multiple Access, A base station (Base Transceiver Station, BTS) in CDMA), a base station (NodeB, NB) in a Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) system, or an evolved type in a long-term evolution system
  • the base station (Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB) can also be a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (Cloud Radio Access Network, CRAN) scenario, or the network device can be a relay station, an access point, a vehicle-mounted device, a Wearable devices and network equipment in the future 5G network or network equipment in the future evolved Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) network, etc.
  • the network device 110 provides services for a cell
  • the terminal device performs paging with the network device through transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources, or spectrum resources) used by the cell
  • the cell may be A cell corresponding to a network device (such as a base station).
  • the cell may belong to a macro base station or a base station corresponding to a small cell.
  • the small cell here may include: Metro cell, Micro cell, Pico cell (Pico cell), Femto cell (Femto cell), etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmission power, and are suitable for providing high-speed data transmission services.
  • the cell may also be a hypercell (Hypercell).
  • the terminal device 120 in this embodiment of the present application may be referred to as user equipment (User Equipment, UE), access terminal, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal , radio paging equipment, user agent or user equipment.
  • the terminal equipment can be paged with one or more core networks via the Radio Access Network (RAN), for example, the user equipment can be a mobile phone (or a "cellular" phone) or a computer with a mobile terminal, etc.
  • RAN Radio Access Network
  • user equipment may also be portable, pocket-sized, hand-held, computer-built, or vehicle-mounted mobile devices that exchange voice and/or data with the wireless access network.
  • the terminal device 120 can be a station (STAION, ST) in the WLAN, can be a smart phone, a portable computer, a global positioning system, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (Session Initiation Protocol, SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (Wireless Local Loop) , WLL) station, Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) device, handheld device with wireless paging function, computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, in-vehicle device, connected car terminal, computer, laptop Computers, handheld paging equipment, handheld computing equipment, satellite wireless equipment, wireless modem cards, television set top boxes (STBs), customer premise equipment (CPEs) and/or for use on wireless systems Other devices for paging and next-generation paging systems. For example, the terminal equipment in the 5G network or the terminal equipment in the future evolved public land mobile network PLMN network, etc.
  • SIP Session Initiation Protocol
  • WLL Wireless Local Loop
  • PDA Personal Digital
  • the terminal device 130 may also be a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices, which are the general term for the intelligent design of daily wear and the development of wearable devices using wearable technology, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable device is not only a hardware device, but also realizes powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-scale, complete or partial functions without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, which needs to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones.
  • the terminal device 130 may also be a terminal device in the Internet of Things (IoT) system.
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a paging scenario to which this embodiment of the present application is applicable.
  • the terminal equipment 230 and the terminal equipment 240 are located in the cell provided by the access network equipment 210
  • the terminal equipment 250 is located in the cell provided by the access network equipment 220 .
  • the terminal device 230, the terminal device 240, and the terminal device 250 belong to the same terminal device group.
  • the functions of the core network 200 are mainly to provide user connection, management of users, and complete bearer of services, and provide an interface to an external network as a bearer network.
  • the establishment of user connection includes functions such as mobility management (mobile management, MM), call management (connection management, CM), switching/routing, and recording notification.
  • User management includes user description, quality of service (QoS), user paging records (accounting), virtual home environment (VHE) and security (corresponding security measures provided by the authentication center include security management for mobile services and security processing for external network access).
  • Bearer connections include access to external public switched telephone networks (PSTNs), external circuit data networks and packet data networks, the internet and intranets, and mobile phone text messages from the mobile network itself Service (Short Message Service, SMS) server and so on.
  • PSTNs public switched telephone networks
  • SMS Short Message Service
  • the basic services that the core network 200 can provide include mobile office, e-commerce, paging, entertainment services, travel and location-based services, remote sensing services (telemetry), and simple messaging services (monitoring and control). and many more.
  • the core network 200 devices may include: access & mobility management function (AMF), session management function (SMF), policy control function (PCF) , user plane function (UPF) and other functional units, these functional units can work independently, or can be combined to achieve some control functions, such as: AMF, SMF and PCF can be combined as a management device for Complete access control and mobility management functions such as access authentication, security encryption, and location registration of terminal equipment, as well as session management functions such as establishment, release, and change of user plane transmission paths, and analyze some slice-related data (such as congestion), terminal equipment-related data functions, UPF mainly completes user plane data routing and forwarding functions, such as: responsible for data packet filtering, data transmission/forwarding, rate control, and generation of billing information for terminal equipment, etc. .
  • AMF access & mobility management function
  • SMF session management function
  • PCF policy control function
  • UPF user plane function
  • the access network device 210 may include an access network/radio access network (RAN) device, a network composed of multiple 5G-RAN nodes, and the 5G-RAN nodes may be: an access point (access point, AP), next-generation new base station (NR nodeB, gNB), next-generation evolved base station (ng-eNB, gNB), transmission receive point (TRP), transmission point (TP) or some other connection into the node.
  • the 5G-RAN node can be further divided into a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU).
  • the access network device 220 may also be a base station (Base Transceiver Station, BTS) in SM or CDMA, a base station (NodeB, NB) in WCDMA, or an evolved base station (Evolutional Node B) in LTE , eNB or eNodeB), or relay station or access point, or vehicle-mounted equipment, wearable equipment and access network equipment in the future 5G network or access network equipment in the future evolved PLMN network, etc.
  • BTS Base Transceiver Station
  • NodeB NodeB
  • Evolutional Node B evolved base station
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • eNB or eNodeB evolved base station
  • relay station or access point or vehicle-mounted equipment, wearable equipment and access network equipment in the future 5G network or access network equipment in the future evolved PLMN network, etc.
  • This application does not specifically limit .
  • the access network device 220 may provide services for a cell, and the terminal device uses the transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources, or spectrum resources) used by the cell to communicate with the access network device
  • the cell may be a cell corresponding to an access network device (such as a base station), and the cell may belong to a macro base station or a base station corresponding to a small cell (Small cell). cell), micro cell (micro cell), pico cell (pico cell), femto cell (femto cell), etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmission power, and are suitable for providing high-speed data transmission services.
  • Each access network device may include one or more antennas. Each access network device can page with multiple terminal devices.
  • the access network equipment may send data or information to the terminal equipment through a forward link (also called a downlink), and receive data or information from the terminal equipment through a reverse link (also called an uplink).
  • Each antenna (or group of antennas) and/or area designed for paging is referred to as a sector of an access network device.
  • antenna groups may be designed to page with terminal equipment in sectors of the access network equipment coverage area.
  • the access network device can transmit signals to all terminal devices in its corresponding sector through a single antenna or multiple antenna transmit diversity. In the process that the access network device performs paging with the terminal device through the forward link, the transmit antenna of the access network device can also use beamforming to improve the signal-to-noise ratio of the forward link.
  • the above-mentioned “device” may also be referred to as an entity, a network element, an apparatus, or a module, etc., which is not particularly limited in this application.
  • the description of "network element” is omitted in some descriptions.
  • the RAN network element is referred to as RAN for short.
  • the "RAN network element” should be understood as RAN.
  • a network element or a RAN entity, hereinafter, the description of the same or similar situations is omitted.
  • various aspects or features of the embodiments of the present application may be implemented as a method, apparatus or article of manufacture using standard programming and/or engineering techniques.
  • article of manufacture encompasses a computer program accessible from any computer readable device, carrier or medium.
  • computer readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (eg, hard disks, floppy disks, or magnetic tapes, etc.), optical disks (eg, Compact Disc (CD), Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (eg, Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EPROM), cards, stick or key drives, etc.).
  • various storage media described herein can represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information.
  • the term "machine-readable medium” may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
  • multiple application programs may be run at the application layer.
  • the application program that executes the method of this embodiment of the present application is the same as the application program used to control the receiving end device to complete the received data processing.
  • the application of the corresponding action may be a different application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a paging process to which this embodiment of the present application is applicable.
  • a terminal device in the RRC_IDLE state of RRC_IDLE or the RRC_INACTIVE state of RRC_INACTIVE monitors its own paging opportunity PO in each paging cycle to determine whether the network has performed paging.
  • the network device selects a certain paging range, and sends paging downlink control information DCI within the PO.
  • the paging range is the area where the network device sends paging
  • the area may include one or more cells under one or more base stations, and the area is determined by the network device, for example, for the radio resource control idle state RRC_IDLE
  • the network device can use the Tracking Area (TA) to which the UE belongs as the paging area; for the RRC_INACTIVE UE in the radio resource control inactive state, the network device can use the RAN Notification Area (RAN Notification Area) to which the UE belongs.
  • RAN notification area
  • RNA RAN-based Notification Area
  • the paging DCI may include scheduling information of paging messages (including time-frequency domain information and other scheduling information for scheduling resources of paging messages) and/or short messages, etc. As shown in the table below:
  • the user equipment UE determines subsequent operations according to the content of the paging DCI, and the specific content is:
  • the UE receives and decodes the paging message on the Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH) according to the scheduling information, and then determines the subsequent operation according to the content of the paging message.
  • the paging message includes UE identification information of one or more UEs paged by the network and/or access type information of the paged UEs.
  • the UE After decoding the paging message, the UE determines whether the paging message contains its own UE identity: if the paging message does not contain its own UE identity, the UE ignores the paging message; if the paging message contains its own UE identity identifier, the UE determines subsequent operations according to other contents in the paging message.
  • the UE receives updated system information and/or earthquake and tsunami warning or commercial mobile warning according to the indication of the short message.
  • the UE receives the paging message and updated system information and/or earthquake and tsunami warning or commercial mobile warning respectively according to the prescribed procedure.
  • paging can be divided into: CN paging triggered by Core Network (CN) and RAN paging triggered by Radio Access Network (RAN). .
  • the network device may initiate CN paging for RRC_IDLE UE, and may initiate CN paging or RAN paging for RRC_INACTIVE UE.
  • a paging initiated by the network device may target one or more UEs, that is, a paging message may carry the UE identifiers of one or more UEs.
  • an energy saving signal can be introduced into the paging mechanism, and the wake-up signal WUS is a kind of energy saving signal.
  • the network device may send WUS before or on the paging occasion PO to indicate whether the UE needs to monitor the PO or receive a paging message next, so as to avoid unnecessary paging reception by the UE.
  • the type of WUS may include but is not limited to including downlink control information DCI, physical layer signal/sequence, medium access control unit MAC CE, radio resource control RRC signaling, etc.
  • the energy-saving signal is introduced, there are still cases in which all UEs in the PO receive and decode the paging message due to various reasons. Finally, it is found that the paging message does not have its own UE identity, that is, the network device does not actually page. Therefore, the UE causes unnecessary monitoring and reception of paging by the UE, resulting in the problem of false paging alarms and unnecessary power consumption of the UE.
  • the causes of false paging alarms may be as follows:
  • the PO positions calculated by different UEs may be the same.
  • the UE When multiple UEs monitor the same PO, in the paging mechanism, the UE only obtains the scheduling information of the paging message when it receives the paging DCI, but cannot distinguish whether the paging message is not.
  • the UE In order to target its own paging message, the UE can only determine whether the first paging is for itself or not according to the UE identification information in the paging message after receiving and decoding the paging message on the PDSCH subsequently. Therefore, for a UE that is not actually paged, there is unnecessary paging message reception and decoding, resulting in unnecessary UE power consumption.
  • the network device When the network paging the UE, if the paged UE fails to receive the paging successfully, the network device will continue paging on the relevant PO, causing other unrelated UEs to receive and decode unnecessary paging messages again. .
  • the network paging the UE When the network paging the UE, it will send the paging within a certain paging range, and all the UEs within the paging range that have the same PO position as the paged UE will receive the paging, but except the paged UE, other The UE performs unnecessary reception and decoding of paging messages.
  • the network device may replace or expand the paging range to continue paging, resulting in the paging involving more UEs in a wider range. Therefore, if the paging range determined by the network is not optimized, more unrelated UEs will generate paging false alarms.
  • the present application designs a solution to reduce paging false alarms.
  • the UE reports the camping or visiting cell by distinguishing whether the paging is a new paging or repeated paging. information, as well as three ways to distinguish UEs in different RRC states during paging, to optimize the determination and selection of paging objects, reduce the impact of paging on irrelevant UEs, and thus reduce false paging alarms, so as to avoid the occurrence of Unnecessary UE power consumption.
  • FIG. 4 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a method for paging according to the present application.
  • the method includes:
  • the network device sends first indication information to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device.
  • the type of the first paging includes: non-repetitive paging or paging repetition (paging repetition).
  • the indication information is used to determine the type of the first page.
  • the network device before sending the indication information to the terminal device, the network device will select a certain paging range.
  • the paging range is the area where the network device sends the page, and the area is determined by the network device. For example, for a UE in the RRC idle state, the network device can use the Tracking Area (TA) to which the UE belongs as the paging range; for a UE in the RRC inactive state, the network device can use the RAN (Radio Access Network) to which the UE belongs.
  • the RAN Notification Area (RAN) is used as the paging area.
  • the first indication information can carry but is not limited to downlink control information (Downlink Control Information, DCI), physical layer signal/sequence (sequence), medium access control element (MAC Control Element, MAC CE), unlimited resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) message, etc.
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • Sequence physical layer signal/sequence
  • MAC Control Element medium access control element
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the specific bearer signaling or message may include, but is not limited to, a wake up signal (Wake Up Signal, WUS), paging DCI, paging message, and the like.
  • the repeated paging satisfies: if the content of the paging message (paging message) of the first paging is the same as the content of the paging message of the second paging, the first paging is a repeated paging.
  • the second paging is a paging sent before the first paging; or, if the terminal equipment of the first paging belongs to the terminal equipment of the second paging, the first paging is a repeated paging, the The second page is a page sent before the first page.
  • the first paging is a repeated paging, which can be understood as: this paging is the same as the previous paging terminal equipment
  • the identification information and/or access type information, and the specific paging message are the same.
  • the content of the paging message may include, but is not limited to, identification information of the terminal device, access type information, system information update instruction, earthquake and tsunami warning/commercial mobile warning, and the like.
  • the first paging is repeated paging, which can be understood as: the terminal equipment to be paged this time belongs to the terminal equipment that has been paged before this paging. Part or all of the terminal equipment being paged.
  • the content of the paging message is not limited here, and only the user equipment to be paged is considered.
  • the second paging is a repeated page because UE 1 and UE 2 have been paged before; for another example, the UEs paged for the first time are UE 1 and UE 2, and the UEs paged for the second time are UE 1, UE 2 and UE 3, then the first The second paging is not a paging that is sent repeatedly, mainly for UE3; for another example, the UEs that are paged for the first time are UE1, UE2 and UE3, and the UEs that are paged for the second time are UE1 And UE4, the second paging is not a repeated paging, mainly for UE4.
  • the manner in which the network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device may be an explicit manner, for example, by using a bit field/field to indicate the type of the first paging; it may also be an implicit manner, for example, by using the same character, Numerical value to indicate the type of the first page.
  • the following describes the three manners in which the network device sends the first indication information, respectively.
  • the network device sends the first indication information when sending a paging, that is, the network device sends the first indication information every time a paging occurs, and the first indication information is used for the terminal.
  • the device determines whether the type of the first paging is non-repeated paging or repeated paging.
  • This embodiment is the way of explicit indication.
  • the type of the first paging is indicated by a bit field/field, and the corresponding relationship between the values of different bit fields and the type of the first paging can be configured by the network device, as shown in Table 2.
  • the network device sends a 1-bit first indication information to the terminal device, wherein the first indication information is "0", indicating that the type of the first paging is a newly sent paging, that is, non-repetitive paging; the first indication information It is "1", indicating that the type of the first paging is the paging that is sent repeatedly.
  • the network device may send a 2-bit first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information is "00", indicating that the type of the first paging is non-repetitive paging, and the first indication information is "01", indicating that the first indication information is "01".
  • the type of the first paging is the paging that is sent repeatedly, and the first indication information is "10", indicating that the type of the first paging is non-repetitive paging, etc.; for another example, the network device may send a 3-bit first page to the terminal device.
  • the first indication information is "000”, indicating that the type of the first paging is non-repetitive paging, and the first indication information is "001", indicating that the type of the first paging is the paging of repeated transmission, and the first indication information is "001".
  • An indication message is "010”, indicating that the type of the first paging is non-repetitive paging and so on.
  • the first indication information may be sent by the network device before paging, or may be sent by the network device at the same time when the network device sends the paging.
  • Table 2 is only used for illustration, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the number of bits occupied by the first indication information.
  • the network device may also send first indication information when sending a new paging, indicating that this paging is a non-repetitive paging; or, the network device may send the first indication information when sending a paging repeatedly; The first indication information indicates that this paging is a repeated paging.
  • the network device may only send the first indication information when sending a new paging to determine that the type of the first paging is non-repetitive paging; if the type of the first paging is repeated paging, the network device The first indication information may not be sent; or, the network device only sends the first indication information when sending repeated paging to determine that the first paging is a repeated paging; if the type of the first paging is non-repetitive paging , the network device may not send the first indication information.
  • the new paging is a non-repetitive paging, and the new paging satisfies: if the content of the paging message (paging message) of the first paging is different from the content of the paging message of the second paging, the first paging is a new page, the second page is a page sent before the first page; or, if one or more of the terminal devices of the first page do not belong to the terminal devices of the second page, the first page The page is a new page and the second page is a page sent before the first page.
  • the second paging is the newly sent page, because UE3 Not paged.
  • the first indication information can carry but is not limited to downlink control information (Downlink Control Information, DCI), physical layer signal/sequence (sequence), medium access control element (MAC Control Element, MAC CE), unlimited resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) message, etc.
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • Sequence physical layer signal/sequence
  • MAC Control Element medium access control element
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the specific bearer signaling or message may include, but is not limited to, a wake up signal (Wake Up Signal, WUS), paging DCI, paging message, and the like.
  • the first indication information is carried in different signaling, and the processing performed by the terminal equipment is also different. Specifically, the network device sends the first indication information before paging. Assuming that the first indication information is carried in the wake-up signal WUS, the terminal device determines whether it needs to monitor PO (that is, receive paging DCI) and receive paging subsequently. message; or the network device sends the first indication information during paging, assuming that the first indication information is carried in the paging DCI, then the terminal device determines whether it needs to receive a paging message subsequently.
  • PO that is, receive paging DCI
  • the terminal device determines whether it needs to receive a paging message subsequently.
  • This embodiment is the way of explicit indication.
  • the type of the first paging is indicated by a bit field/field, and the corresponding relationship between the values of different bit fields and the type of the first paging can be configured by the network device.
  • the network device may send a 1-bit first indication information "0" when it determines that the type of the sent paging is a new paging, which is used to indicate that the first paging is a newly sent paging.
  • the first indication information is not sent.
  • the terminal device may not carry the first indication information according to the received signaling or message (for example, paging DCI) carrying the indication information.
  • the network device can send a 2-bit first indication message when it determines that the sent paging type is a repeated paging. 00", which is used to indicate that the first paging is a repeatedly sent paging, and when it is determined that the sent paging type is a new paging, the first indication information is not sent.
  • the terminal device can judge that this paging is a non-repetitive paging according to the received paging DCI that does not carry the first indication information, so as to receive and decode the corresponding paging message, and perform subsequent operations; , the network device can send a 3-bit first indication information "000" when determining that the type of the sent paging is repeated paging, which is used to indicate that the first paging is a newly sent paging, and for the determined sending paging When the paging type is repeated paging, the first indication information is not sent. At this time, the terminal device can judge that the paging is a non-repetitive paging according to the received paging DCI without the first indication information, so as to receive and decode the corresponding paging message, and perform subsequent operations and so on.
  • the network device may also send the same first indication information for a group of the same paging, so as to determine whether the type of the first paging is non-repetitive paging or repetitive paging. call.
  • This embodiment is a way of implicit indication.
  • the type of the first paging is indicated by the same characters and numerical values.
  • the correspondence between the values of characters and numerical values and the type of the first paging may be configured by the network device. For example, assuming that a group of the same page is sent a total of 3 times (that is, the first page is a newly sent page, and the second and third pages are repeated pages), the network device sends a page for all 3 pages.
  • the same character or value (for example, "A" or "1”) is used to represent the three pages as a group of the same page.
  • the network device sends another page during these 2 paging times.
  • An identical character or value eg, "B" or "2"
  • the network device can enable the terminal device to indirectly determine whether the type of the first paging is non-repetitive paging or repeated paging by sending the same first indication information in a group of the same paging.
  • the terminal device determines the type of the first paging according to the first indication information.
  • the following describes how the terminal device determines the type of the first paging after receiving the first indication information.
  • the first indication information directly indicates whether the type of the first paging is non-repetitive paging or repetitive paging, and the terminal device can also directly determine according to the first indication information.
  • the type of the first paging is non-repeated paging or repeated paging.
  • the network device sends the first indication information every time it sends a paging
  • the network device selectively sends the first indication information
  • the terminal device can also send the first indication information according to the There is no first indication information so that the paging type of the first paging is determined.
  • the terminal device determines the paging type of the first paging by judging whether the first indication information of the first paging is the same as the last received indication information. That is, if the first indication information of the first paging is different from the first indication information received last time, it is determined that the type of the first paging is non-repetitive paging, and the first paging is received; or, if the first paging The first indication information is the same as the first indication information received last time, it is determined that the type of the first paging is repeated paging, and the first paging is not received.
  • S430 Determine whether to receive or not to receive the first paging according to the first paging type.
  • the following describes how the terminal device determines whether to receive the first paging after determining the type of the first paging.
  • the terminal device may determine whether to receive the first paging according to whether the type of the first paging is non-repetitive paging or repeated paging, and combined with previously received paging conditions. If the type of the first paging is non-repeated paging, the first paging is received; or, if the type of the first paging is repeated paging, the first paging is not received.
  • the terminal device if the type of the first paging is repeated paging, and the terminal device has not received a paging before the first paging, the first paging is received; or, if the type of the first paging is repeated paging paging, and the terminal device has already received the paging before the first paging, it will not receive the first paging.
  • the fact that the terminal device has not received the paging includes but is not limited to: the terminal device has not received the paging within a certain period of time before the first paging (for example, within N paging cycles) and/or on the serving cell it is currently camping on over-paging, or the terminal device has not received the same page as the first page before the first page.
  • the fact that the terminal device has received the paging includes, but is not limited to: the terminal device has already been in a certain time before the first paging (for example, within N paging cycles) and/or on the serving cell it is currently camping on. A page has been received, or the terminal device has received the same page as the first page before the first page.
  • the terminal device may further determine whether to receive paging in combination with the wake-up signal WUS. For example, the WUS sent by the network device is received before or on the paging occasion PO. If the WUS indicates that the terminal device needs to receive paging, the terminal device uses the above method to determine whether to The first page is received; if the WUS indicates that the terminal device does not need to receive the page, the terminal device may not receive the first page.
  • the terminal device when the WUS indicates that the terminal device needs to receive the paging, if the first paging is a newly sent paging, the terminal device receives the first paging; if the first paging is a repeatedly sent paging, and If the terminal device has not received the page before the first page, it will receive the first page; or, if the type of the first page is repeated paging, and the terminal device has received the first page before the first page paged, the first page is not received.
  • the fact that the terminal device has not received the paging includes but is not limited to: the terminal device has not received the paging within a certain period of time before the first paging (for example, within N paging cycles) and/or on the serving cell it is currently camping on over-paging, or the terminal device has not received the same page as the first page before the first page.
  • the fact that the terminal device has received the paging includes, but is not limited to: the terminal device has already been in a certain time before the first paging (for example, within N paging cycles) and/or on the serving cell it is currently camping on. A page has been received, or the terminal device has received the same page as the first page before the first page.
  • the terminal device determines not to receive the first paging according to the type of the first paging, it can be understood as: if the first indication information is sent by the network device before sending the paging, the terminal device can An indication information determines the type of the first paging.
  • the terminal equipment may not monitor the PO or There is no need to receive and decode the paging message; if the first indication information is sent by the network device at the same time as sending the paging, for example, in the paging DCI, or together with the paging DCI, then the terminal device needs to listen on the PO The first indication information, and then determine the type of the first paging according to the first indication information. If the first indication information indicates that the first paging is a repeated paging and the terminal device has received the paging before, then the terminal The device may then not need to receive and decode the corresponding paging message.
  • the terminal device may determine whether to receive the first paging according to whether the type of the first paging is non-repetitive paging or repeated paging, and combined with previously received paging conditions. If the first indication information of the first paging is different from the first indication information received last time, it is determined that the type of the first paging is non-repetitive paging, and the first paging is received; The first indication information is the same as the first indication information received last time, it is determined that the type of the first paging is repeated paging, and the first paging is not received.
  • the terminal device may also determine whether to receive a paging in combination with the wake-up signal WUS mechanism. For example, the WUS sent by the network device is received before or on the paging occasion PO. If the WUS indicates that the terminal device needs to receive paging, the terminal device uses the above method to determine whether to The first page is received; if the WUS indicates that the terminal device does not need to receive the page, the terminal device may not receive the first page.
  • the terminal device when the WUS indicates that the terminal device needs to receive the paging, if the first paging is a newly sent paging, the terminal device receives the first paging; if the first paging is a repeatedly sent paging, and If the terminal device has not received the page before the first page, it will receive the first page; or, if the type of the first page is repeated paging, and the terminal device has received the first page before the first page paged, the first page is not received.
  • the fact that the terminal device has not received the paging includes but is not limited to: the terminal device has not received the paging within a certain period of time before the first paging (for example, within N paging cycles) and/or on the serving cell it is currently camping on over-paging, or the terminal device has not received the same page as the first page before the first page.
  • the fact that the terminal device has received the paging includes, but is not limited to: the terminal device has already been in a certain time before the first paging (for example, within N paging cycles) and/or on the serving cell it is currently camping on. A page has been received, or the terminal device has received the same page as the first page before the first page.
  • the terminal device determines not to receive the first paging according to the type of the first paging, it can also be understood as: if the first indication information is sent by the network device before sending the paging, the terminal device can The first indication information determines the type of the first paging. If the first indication information indicates that the first paging is a repeated paging and the terminal device has received the paging before, then the terminal device may not need to monitor or receive the page.
  • the terminal device needs to monitor and receive the paging DCI on the PO, and then according to the first indication
  • An indication message determines the type of the first paging, so as to determine whether to decode the corresponding paging message.
  • the network device indicates whether the paging is a newly sent paging or a repeatedly sent paging, so that the terminal device can determine the type of the first paging according to the first indication information, and receive the paging in combination with itself. It is determined whether to receive the first paging according to the previous paging situation, so that it is not necessary to receive the paging indiscriminately every time, which can avoid irrelevant terminal equipment to repeatedly obtain the paging information that has been received before, and reduce the number of unrelated paging information. Additional power consumption due to necessary listening, receiving and decoding paging messages.
  • the implementation in which the network device uses different values of the bit field as the first indication information may be the same as the implementation in which the same characters and numerical values are sent as the first indication information for the same group of paging. Implemented individually or in combination.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be implemented in the present application.
  • the implementation of the examples constitutes no limitation.
  • FIG. 5 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a method for paging according to the present application.
  • camp the terminal equipment resides in a certain cell, which means that the terminal equipment has completed the cell selection/reselection process and has selected a cell, and the terminal equipment monitors the system information (System Information, SI) on the cell, And (in most cases) listening for paging messages.
  • SI System Information
  • Visit The terminal device has visited a certain cell, which means that the UE has camped on or accessed the cell.
  • the method includes:
  • the terminal device determines first information, where the first information includes: cell identification information and second information of one or more cells that the terminal device camped on/visited, and the second information is the second information that the terminal device camped on/visited Stay probability information on one or more cells.
  • the terminal device sends the first information to the network device, and the network device receives and saves the first information sent by the terminal device, where the first information is used to determine the paging range.
  • the first information further includes: in the first period of time, information about the staying probability of the terminal device on one or more cells; or, on the first cell, the staying of the terminal device in multiple time periods probability information.
  • sending the first information by the terminal device to the network device includes: the terminal device sending the first information of the cell that it may camp on/visit to the core network device and/or the radio access network device.
  • the terminal device sending the first information of the cell that it may camp on/visit to the core network device and/or the radio access network device.
  • paging can be divided into: CN paging triggered by Core Network (CN) and RAN paging triggered by Radio Access Network (RAN). .
  • the network may initiate CN paging for RRC_IDLE UE and CN paging or RAN paging for RRC_INACTIVE UE.
  • the terminal device sends the first information that may reside or access to the core network device CN (for example, AMF), and the CN receives and saves the first information sent by the terminal device.
  • the core network device CN for example, AMF
  • the CN may determine the paging range according to the first information of the camping/visiting cell of the terminal device; or,
  • the CN can send the first information of the terminal equipment's camping/visiting cell to the last serving gNB of the terminal equipment, and the last serving base station last serving gNB determines the paging according to the first information of the terminal equipment's camping/visiting cell scope.
  • the CN may also carry the information about the cell/visit cell of the terminal equipment when sending the data (data) of the terminal equipment to the last serving gNB of the terminal equipment.
  • the first information of the camped/visited cell determines the paging range.
  • the terminal device sends the first information of camping on or visiting the cell to the CN (eg, AMF) and the RAN (eg, gNB), and the CN and RAN receive and save the camping information sent by the terminal device.
  • the CN and RAN receive and save the camping information sent by the terminal device.
  • the CN may determine the paging range by using the first information of the camping/visiting cell of the terminal device; the RAN may determine the paging range using the first information of the camping/visiting cell of the terminal device.
  • the first information of staying or visiting the cell sent by the terminal device includes, but is not limited to, cell identification information, information about the staying probability of the terminal device in the cell, specific time information, and the like.
  • the cell identification information may include, but is not limited to, the physical cell identifier (Physical Cell Identifier, PCI) of the cell, the cell global identifier (Cell Global Identifier, CGI) of the cell, the Public Land Mobile Network (Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN).
  • PCI Physical Cell Identifier
  • CGI Cell Global Identifier
  • PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
  • the stop probability information may be a specific probability value (eg, the stop probability is 0.2 or 20%), a probability level (eg, the stop probability is high, medium, low, etc.), or other forms.
  • the staying probability may be obtained by the terminal device according to its own historical situation statistics, or may be obtained by the network device according to the statistics of the staying or visiting cell information sent by the terminal device. For example, the terminal device counts the number of times of camping on/visiting a certain cell (within a period of time) to obtain the staying probability; or, the terminal device counts the duration of camping on/visiting a certain cell to obtain the staying probability, etc.
  • UE1 only camps on/visits in cell A, cell B and cell C, wherein the number of times UE1 camps on/visits cell A is 3 times, and the duration is 8h; UE1 camps on/visits cell A for 8 hours;
  • the number of times of B is 5 times, and the duration is 12h;
  • the times of UE1 camping/visiting cell C is 7 times, and the duration is 4h;
  • the probability of UE1 staying in cell A, cell B and cell C is obtained according to the statistics of the number of camping/visiting They are 1/5 (low), 1/3 (medium) and 7/15 (high) respectively; according to the dwell/access duration statistics, the staying probability of UE1 in cell A, cell B and cell C is 1/3 ( Medium), 1/2 (High), 1/6 (Low).
  • the network may configure or may specify a calculation rule for the stay probability in a protocol.
  • network configuration/protocol specified parameters/thresholds are used to determine stay probability levels, etc.
  • the duration, times, specific time, earliest/latest access/residence time of the terminal equipment to camp on/visit the cell, etc. can be used as parameters, and the quantified value of multiple statistical results can be used as the threshold to determine the terminal equipment.
  • the stop probability information For example, through network configuration or specified in the protocol, the terminal device is parked/accessed for more than 15h for a specified time (eg, 24h) and/or the terminal device is within a specified camping or access frequency (eg, 24h). , 10 times) one or more cells with more than 6 times of staying/visiting are determined to have a higher staying probability and can be used as the paging range of the terminal device.
  • the duration of 15h and the frequency of 6 times can be specified thresholds.
  • specific time information may also be combined, so as to better determine or optimize the paging range of the target terminal device. For example, the information about the staying/visiting cell of the terminal equipment in each time period; or, for each cell, the information about the staying probability of the terminal equipment in each time period.
  • the terminal device transmits the camping cell in period 1 and the optional staying probability information on each cell, the camping cell in period 2 and the optional staying probability information on each cell, and so on.
  • UE1 sends cells A, B, and C to camp on in time period 1, and the staying probability information on each cell is 20%, 30%, and 50%, respectively; UE1 sends cell A to camp on in time period 2. and D, the staying probability information on each cell is 40%, 60%.
  • the terminal device transmits the staying probability information in each time period on the cell 1, the staying probability information in each time period on the cell 2, and the like.
  • the staying probability information sent by UE1 in each time period on cell 1 is 60% (for example, 8:00-20:00), 25% (for example, 20:00-24:00), and 15% (for example, 0:00-8:00)
  • the staying probability information sent by UE1 in each time period on cell 2 is 40% (for example, 8:00-20:00) and 30% (for example, 20:00-24:00) ) and 20% (for example, 0:00-8:00).
  • the auxiliary network device determines or optimizes the paging range of the target UE.
  • the first information sent by the terminal device does not necessarily need to be directed to all cells, and may be determined by the terminal device itself (for example, only the information of the cell with a high staying probability of the terminal device is sent), or it may be specified by the network/protocol
  • the terminal device only sends information about cells that meet certain conditions (for example, the network/protocol stipulates that only cells whose staying probability exceeds a certain threshold need to be reported), etc.
  • the network/protocol stipulates that only cells whose staying probability exceeds a certain threshold need to be reported, etc.
  • the network device determines the paging range of the terminal device according to the first information.
  • the CN may determine the paging range according to the first information of the camping/visiting cell of the terminal device; or,
  • the CN may send the first information of the terminal equipment's camping/visiting cell to the last serving gNB of the terminal equipment, and the last serving base station last serving gNB is determined according to the first information of the terminal equipment's camping/visiting cell paging range.
  • the CN may also carry the first information of the terminal device's camping/visiting cell when sending the terminal device's data (data) to the last serving gNB of the terminal device, and the last serving gNB according to the last serving gNB The first information of the camped/visited cell of the terminal device determines the paging range.
  • the CN may determine the paging range by using the first information of the camping/visiting cell of the terminal device; the RAN may determine the paging range using the first information of the camping/visiting cell of the terminal device.
  • the network device sends a page to the terminal device according to the paging range, and the terminal device receives the page sent by the network device, and the page is used to page the terminal device.
  • the way that the network device determines the paging range of the terminal device may be: select one or more cells where the terminal device has a high staying probability in the current period as the paging range of the terminal device, and send the data within the paging range. paging.
  • the terminal device sends the cell identification information, the terminal device's staying probability information in the cell, and the specific time information in the information about its own camping or visiting cell, which can be implemented independently or in combination. That is, the way that the network device determines the paging range of the target terminal device may be determined according to the cell identification information in the information of the cells that the terminal device is sent to camp on or visit; or, the way that the network device determines the paging range of the target terminal device may be to select the terminal device.
  • One or more cells with a higher probability of device staying are used as the paging range of the terminal device; alternatively, the network device may determine the paging range by selecting one or more cells with a higher staying probability of the terminal device in the current period of time as the paging range.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application allow the network device to further determine or optimize the paging range by sending the information about its own camping or visiting cell by the terminal device, ensure the paging success probability of the paged terminal device, and reduce the number of undesired Impact of unrelated end devices in the relevant area. That is, when the network device needs the terminal device to initiate paging, it can determine the (current) cell where the terminal device may or has a high probability to stay, so it can preferentially initiate paging in one or more cells where the terminal device may or has a high probability of staying. , thereby reducing paging false alarms in the system.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be implemented in the present application.
  • the implementation of the examples constitutes no limitation.
  • FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a method for paging according to the present application.
  • the method includes:
  • the network device sends the first grouping parameter to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the first grouping parameter sent by the network device, where the first grouping parameter is used by the terminal device to determine a grouping group number, and the grouping group number is used by the network device to send a search call.
  • the first grouping parameter includes a group number range or a group number offset
  • the group number range includes the first group number range and/or the second group number range
  • the first group number range is the radio resource control idle
  • the group number range of the terminal equipment in the RRC_IDLE state the first group number range is the group number range of the RRC_INACTIVE terminal equipment in the radio resource control inactive state
  • the group number offset includes the first group number offset and/or the second group number. number offset
  • the first group number offset is the group number offset of the RRC_IDLE terminal device in the RRC idle state
  • the second group number offset is the group number of the RRC_INACTIVE terminal device in the radio resource control inactive state Offset.
  • the network device can divide the idle UE and the inactive UE into different UE groups by dividing the range of the group number used by the idle UE and the inactive UE, or by configuring the group number offset for the idle UE or the inactive UE.
  • the idle UE and the inactive UE are in different groups.
  • the network device will not send RAN paging to idle UE, but may only send CN paging, but the network device may send RAN paging or CN paging to inactive UE.
  • the following describes how to send and receive the first grouping parameter between the network device and the terminal device in three specific ways.
  • the network device broadcasts the first grouping parameter; or, the network device sends the first grouping parameter through a radio resource control RRC message.
  • the terminal device receives the first grouping parameter from a broadcast message; or, the terminal device receives the first grouping parameter from a radio resource control RRC message.
  • radio resource control RRC message may be an RRC release message.
  • the network device broadcasts the first group number range of the RRC_IDLE terminal device in the radio resource control idle state and/or the second group number range of the RRC_INACTIVE terminal device in the radio resource control inactive state. For example, assuming that the total number of groups broadcast by the network device is N, if the group number of the idle UE ranges from 0 to M, and the first group number of the inactive UE is in the range of M+1 to N, then the network device sends a message to the terminal device for The first group number range of idle UE is 0 ⁇ M, and the second group number range M+1 ⁇ N for inactive UE is sent.
  • the terminal device receives the first group number range of the RRC_IDLE terminal device in the radio resource control idle state and/or the second group number range of the radio resource control inactive state RRC_INACTIVE terminal device from the broadcast message.
  • the terminal device receives the first group number range 0-M for the idle UE sent by the network device, and receives the second group number range M+1-N-1 for the inactive UE.
  • the network device broadcasts the first group number offset (offset) of the RRC_IDLE terminal device in the radio resource control idle state and/or the second group number offset (offset) of the radio resource control inactive state RRC_INACTIVE terminal device. For example, assuming that the group number offset of the idle UE or the inactive UE broadcast by the network device is W, then the network device sends the first group number offset W for the idle UE to the terminal device, or sends the second group number for the inactive UE. number offset W.
  • the terminal device receives the first group number offset of the RRC_IDLE terminal device in the radio resource control idle state and/or the second group number offset of the radio resource control inactive state RRC_INACTIVE terminal device from the broadcast message. For example, correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first group number offset W for the idle UE sent by the network device, or receives the second group number offset W for the inactive UE.
  • the group number offset W may only be for a UE in one RRC state.
  • the first group number offset sent is for the idle UE, then the group number of the inactive UE does not need to be offset, so as to ensure that the RRC_IDLE UE and the RRC_INACTIVE UE are distributed in different groups.
  • the network device may configure and send the first grouping parameter of the inactive UE, the second group number range or the second group number offset of the inactive UE in the RRC message of the RRC amount, etc. For example, assuming that the total number of groups broadcast by the network device is N, and the second group number range of the inactive UE is divided into M+1 ⁇ N-1, then the network device sends the second group number range for the inactive UE to the terminal device as M+1 ⁇ N-1; or, assuming that the offset of the second group number of the inactive UE broadcast by the network device is W, then the offset of the second group number of the inactive UE sent by the network device to the terminal device is W.
  • the terminal device receives the second group number range or the second group number offset of the radio resource control inactive state RRC_INACTIVE terminal device from the radio resource control RRC message.
  • the range of the second group number for the inactive UE sent by the terminal device to the network device is M+1 to N-1; or, the terminal device receives the offset of the second group number for the inactive UE sent by the network device W.
  • the terminal device determines a grouping group number according to the first grouping parameter, where the grouping group number is used for the network device to send paging.
  • the RRC_IDLE terminal device in the radio resource control idle state determines the group number according to the first group number range or the offset of the first group number;
  • the second group number offset determines the grouping group number.
  • the first grouping parameter includes a group number range or a group number offset
  • the RRC_IDLE UE determines the grouping group number of the idle UE used for paging according to the first group number range and/or the group number offset; or, RRC_INACTIVE The UE determines the grouping group number of the inactive UE for paging according to the second group number range or the group number offset.
  • the terminal device determines that its own group number is within the group number range indicated by the network. For example, if the group ID of the idle UE ranges from 0 to M, the group ID finally used by the idle UE needs to be in the range of 0 to M. At this time, the group number of the inactive UE ranges from M+1 to N-1, and the group number finally used by the inactive UE must be in the range of M+1 to N-1.
  • the formula for calculating the group numbers of idle UEs and inactive UEs is not limited, as long as it can be ensured that idle UEs and inactive UEs are in different groups.
  • the UE_ID is a consensus between the network device and the user equipment, and the UE_ID is configured by the network device, or the user equipment has been configured when it leaves the factory.
  • UE_ID can be IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity), S-TMSI (SAE Temporary Mobile Station Identifier) allocated by MME or 5G-S-TMSI (SAE Temporary Mobile Station Identifier) allocated by AMF.
  • IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity
  • S-TMSI SAE Temporary Mobile Station Identifier
  • 5G-S-TMSI SAE Temporary Mobile Station Identifier
  • the number of UE groups broadcast by the network is 10
  • the number of idle UEs and inactive UEs are 50 respectively, and their UE_IDs are 0 to 49 and 50 to 99 respectively.
  • the group number of the idle UE ranges from 0 to 3
  • the group number finally used by the idle UE needs to be in the range of 0 to 3
  • the group number of the inactive UE is in the range of 4 to 9
  • the group number finally used by the inactive UE It needs to fall within the range of 4 to 9.
  • the formula for calculating the group numbers of idle UEs and inactive UEs is not limited, as long as it can be ensured that idle UEs and inactive UEs are in different groups.
  • the paging probabilities are 0%-49% and 50%-99% respectively.
  • the group number of the idle UE ranges from 0 to 3
  • the group number finally used by the idle UE needs to be in the range of 0 to 3
  • the group number of the inactive UE is in the range of 4 to 9
  • the group number finally used by the inactive UE It needs to fall within the range of 4 to 9.
  • the network device will broadcast the correspondence between the group and the paging probability.
  • group 0 corresponds to paging probability 0-20%
  • group 2 corresponds to paging probability.
  • the call probability is 21% to 40% and so on.
  • the terminal device uses the group number offset to determine its own group number. For example, if the group ID offset of the idle UE is W, then the UE needs to use the group ID offset when calculating the final used group ID.
  • the formula for calculating the group numbers of idle UEs and inactive UEs is not limited, as long as it can be ensured that idle UEs and inactive UEs are in different groups.
  • the idle UE and the inactive UE must belong to the group number range of 0 to L-1.
  • the group number offset of the idle UE is W
  • the group number of the idle UE does not fall within the group number range of 0 to L-1.
  • the value of W is greater than or equal to L.
  • the inactive UE does not have a group number offset.
  • the inactive UE completely falls within the group number range of 0 to L-1. At this point, it can be ensured that the idle UE and the inactive UE are in different groups.
  • the number of UE groups broadcast by the network is 10
  • the number of idle UEs and inactive UEs are 50 respectively
  • their UE_IDs are 0 to 49 and 50 to 99 respectively.
  • the idle UE and the inactive UE are evenly distributed in the 10 groups based on the grouping method of the UE identification information.
  • set the group number offset of the idle UE to 11, and select "+" for the calculation method of the group number offset, then the UE needs to use the group number offset to calculate the final group number used.
  • the grouping range to which the inactive UE belongs is 0 to 9
  • the grouping range to which the idle UE belongs is 11 to 20. The calculation of the group numbers of other UEs will not be repeated here.
  • the formula for calculating the group numbers of the idle UE and the inactive UE is not limited, and the method for calculating the offset is also not limited, as long as it can be ensured that the idle UE and the inactive UE are in different groups.
  • the number of UE groups broadcast by the network is L
  • the group number offset of the idle UE is W
  • the group number of the idle UE does not fall within the group number range of 0 to L-1.
  • the value of W should be larger than L as much as possible.
  • the inactive UE does not have a group number offset. At this time, the inactive UE completely falls within the group number range of 0 to L-1. At this point, it can be ensured that the idle UE and the inactive UE are in different groups.
  • the number of UE groups broadcast by the network is 10, and the number of idle UEs and inactive UEs is 50, respectively, and their paging probabilities are 0% to 49% and 50% to 99%, respectively.
  • the paging probabilities are 0% to 49% and 50% to 99%, respectively.
  • the number is -1.
  • the grouping range to which the inactive UE belongs is 0 to 9
  • the grouping range to which the idle UE belongs is -10 to -1.
  • the calculation of the group numbers of other UEs will not be repeated here.
  • the UE uses the group number offset to determine its own group number. For example, if the group number offset of the inactive UE is W, the UE needs to use the group number offset when calculating the final group number used.
  • the specific calculation method of the grouping group number is the same as the above content, and will not be repeated here.
  • the network device may configure the first grouping parameter of the inactive UE in the RRC message. For example, based on the way of grouping UE identification information, the terminal device determines that its group number is within the range of the group number indicated by the network; or, based on the way that UEs are grouped by paging probability, the terminal device uses the group number offset to determine its own group number number, etc.
  • the specific implementation manner is the same as the corresponding methods of the foregoing manners 1 and 2, and details are not described herein again.
  • the network device sends the paging to the terminal device according to the group number.
  • the network device sends the group number of the RRC_IDLE UE and the group number of the RRC_INACTIVE UE before sending the paging or while the paging occurs. For example, if the paging information with the group number is sent before the paging occasion PO, the unrelated terminal equipment may not receive or decode the paging message; or, if the paging information with the group number is in the If it is sent on the paging occasion PO, the unrelated terminal equipment needs to receive the paging message, but may not decode the paging message.
  • the solutions of the embodiments of the present application can avoid extra power consumption caused by unnecessary paging reception of unrelated UEs.
  • the network device can directly send paging to the group number where the target terminal device is located.
  • the network device For example, assuming that the network device needs to page UE1 and UE2, UE1 determines that the group number it belongs to is the fifth group according to the first grouping parameter, and UE2 determines that the group number it belongs to is the eighth group according to the first grouping parameter, then the network device only It is necessary to send paging information (including paging DCI and paging messages) for groups 5 and 8, and the terminal equipments of groups 5 and 8 further determine the paging type according to the solution provided in this application, and combine with the previously received It suffices to further judge whether to receive the paging message according to the past paging situation, while the terminal equipment in other group numbers does not need to monitor, receive and decode the paging message.
  • paging information including paging DCI and paging messages
  • This not only improves the success probability of paging the target UE1 and UE2, but also reduces the power consumption of the network device for sending paging, and tries to avoid irrelevant terminal devices from receiving unnecessary paging messages indiscriminately, thereby reducing the power consumption. Paging false alarms.
  • the first grouping parameter is sent to the terminal device through the network device, and the terminal devices in different RRC states correspond to different grouping parameters.
  • the RRC_INACTIVE UE calculates its own group number according to the first group number range and the second group number range corresponding to the first grouping parameter, so that the idle UE and the inactive UE can be divided into different groups, which can avoid when the network device When the inactive UE frequently initiates RAN paging, the idle UE frequently receives unnecessary RAN paging, resulting in unnecessary power consumption.
  • the probability that the network device initiates paging to the inactive UE may be higher than the probability that the inactive UE initiates paging. Dividing the idle UE and the inactive UE into different groups can prevent the network from frequently paging the inactive UE. The paging effect of idle UE frequently makes unnecessary paging reception.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be implemented in the present application.
  • the implementation of the examples constitutes no limitation.
  • FIG. 7 shows a schematic diagram of another example of the method for paging in the present application.
  • the network device and the terminal device determine the second grouping parameter through negotiation, the network device determines the second grouping parameter, that is, information related to the terminal device grouping, and the terminal device determines the grouping group number according to the first grouping parameter.
  • the implementation steps of specifically determining the grouping group number are as follows:
  • the terminal device sends the second grouping parameter to the core network device, and the core network device receives the second grouping parameter sent by the terminal device, where the second grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • the second grouping parameter may be, but is not limited to, a parameter related to the service of the terminal device.
  • the service requirement level of the terminal equipment For example, there are currently three service demand levels: high, medium and low.
  • the terminal device UE1 determines its desired service demand level as high, and sends the second grouping parameter to the core network device.
  • the core network device receives the corresponding The business class is Advanced.
  • the terminal device may determine the second grouping parameter based on any one or more of the following contents, that is, the information related to the grouping of the terminal device, including: a quality of service (Quality of Service, QoS) parameter of the service of the terminal device.
  • QoS Quality of Service
  • the packet delay budget Packet Delay Budget, PDB
  • the packet error rate Packet Error Rate, PER
  • the priority level Default Priority Level
  • the service type of the terminal device For example, enhanced Mobile Broadband (eMBB) service, Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication (URLLC) service, massive Machine Type of Communication (mMTC) service, etc. ; and/or the mobility state or movement speed of the terminal device, etc.
  • eMBB enhanced Mobile Broadband
  • URLLC Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication
  • mMTC massive Machine Type of Communication
  • the terminal device sends the desired grouping-related information to the core network device; the core network device accepts the desired grouping-related information of the terminal device.
  • the second grouping parameter is the service requirement level of the terminal device. Assuming that there are three service demand levels of high, medium, and low, the terminal device UE1 determines its expected service demand level as high, and sends the service demand level to the network device.
  • the second grouping parameter expected by the terminal device is received and agreed, so that the network device and the terminal device reach a consensus, and the second grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping of the terminal device.
  • the network device may also reject the second grouping parameter, and then send feedback information to the terminal device. After receiving the feedback information, the terminal device will adjust the service demand level and resend the second grouping parameter; or,
  • the terminal may also not continue to send the second grouping parameter.
  • S720 The core network device sends the second grouping parameter to the access network device, and the access network device receives the second grouping parameter sent by the core network device, where the second grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • the access network device when it sends paging to the terminal device, it will determine the grouping group number of the terminal device according to the second grouping parameter and the fourth grouping parameter, and then send the paging according to the grouping group number. Assuming that the access network device needs to page the terminal device UE1, and the grouping group number of the UE1 is group 1, the access network device only needs to send a page to the group 1 where the terminal device UE1 is located.
  • the core network device determines and sends a third grouping parameter to the access network device, and the access network device receives the third grouping parameter sent by the core network device, where the third grouping parameter is used to determine the fourth grouping parameter.
  • the third grouping parameter that is, the information related to the grouping of the terminal equipment may be, but not limited to, the parameters related to the service of the terminal equipment.
  • the service requirement level all The level of possible business requirements. For example, there are currently three service requirement levels, high, medium, and low, and the core network equipment divides the three service demand levels into three groups correspondingly.
  • the second grouping parameter is for the service demand level corresponding to the specific terminal device, for example, the service demand levels of UE1 and UE2 are respectively high and low.
  • the third grouping parameter is grouping-related information that the core network device classifies according to the service requirements of all terminal devices within its jurisdiction, and the information related to the UE grouping is the service requirement level.
  • the network equipment divides the service demand levels of all terminal equipment into three grades: high, medium and low, and sends this division rule and division result as the third grouping parameter to the base station for the base station to determine the fourth grouping according to the third grouping parameter.
  • the fourth grouping parameter includes: the group number or group number range of the terminal equipment corresponding to each service requirement level.
  • the core network device when the core network device initiates paging to the terminal device, it sends the terminal device-specific information related to the terminal device grouping to the base station. For example, in the case where the information related to the grouping of the terminal equipment is the service requirement level, the core network equipment may notify the base station of all possible service requirement levels. Assume that the network equipment divides the service demand levels of all terminal equipment into three grades: high, medium and low, and divides them into three corresponding groups. The division rules and division results are sent to the base station as the third grouping parameter for the base station to use The third grouping parameter determines the fourth grouping parameter.
  • the terminal device may also send the second grouping information to the wireless access network device.
  • the access network device determines the fourth grouping parameter according to the third grouping parameter.
  • the fourth grouping parameter includes, but is not limited to: the group number range used by the terminal device corresponding to each service requirement level, and/or the group number.
  • the access network device may correspondingly divide the received terminal device into three groups: A group, B group, and C group according to the service level of the received terminal device: high, medium, and low, or the access network device corresponds to the The range of group numbers to which high, medium and low grade terminal devices belong are set to 0-2 groups, 3-4 groups and 5-7 groups respectively.
  • the access network device broadcasts the fourth grouping parameter to the terminal device, or the network device sends the fourth grouping parameter to the terminal device through an RRC message, and the terminal device receives the information sent by the access network device from the broadcast message or the radio resource control RRC message.
  • the fourth grouping parameter, the fourth grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • the access network device can send the group number or group number range corresponding to each service requirement level, and the terminal device receives the group number corresponding to each service requirement level. number or group number range. Assume that the network equipment divides the service requirements of all terminal equipment into three grades: high, medium, and low, correspondingly divided into 6 groups, and the group number ranges are 0-2 groups, 3-4 groups, and 5 groups respectively. Then the wireless access network device can send the rule to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device determines a grouping group number according to the fourth grouping parameter and the second grouping parameter, where the grouping group number is used for the network device to send paging.
  • the terminal device receives the group number or group number range corresponding to each service requirement level sent by the network device, and the terminal device receives the group number or group number range corresponding to each service requirement level.
  • the network equipment divides the service requirements of all terminal equipment into three grades: high, medium, and low, correspondingly divided into 6 groups, and the group number ranges are 0-2 groups, 3-4 groups, and 5 groups respectively.
  • the terminal device determines its own service demand level according to the second grouping parameter, and further confirms the group number to which it belongs.
  • the access network device determines a grouping group number according to the fourth grouping parameter and the second grouping parameter, where the grouping group number is used for the network device to send paging.
  • the core network (when paging the terminal equipment is initiated) sends the terminal equipment-specific information related to the terminal equipment grouping to the access network equipment, or the terminal equipment sends its own specific terminal equipment grouping related information. to the base station.
  • the core network (when paging the terminal equipment is initiated) sends the service demand level of the terminal equipment to the access network equipment, or the terminal equipment sends its own service demand level to the access network equipment.
  • the demand level is sent to the access network equipment.
  • the base station determines the grouping of the terminal device according to the specific information related to the terminal device grouping, and performs paging.
  • terminal devices with the same or similar characteristics can be grouped into the same group by negotiating information related to the terminal device grouping between the terminal device and the core network device according to the characteristics of the terminal device.
  • the terminal equipment grouping according to the service characteristics of the terminal equipment can group the terminal equipment with the same/similar service types or service requirements into the same group, try to ensure that the terminal equipment to be paged this time belongs to the same group, thereby reducing irrelevant The probability of being paged by the terminal equipment;
  • the terminal equipment grouping according to the mobile characteristics can group the terminal equipment with the same or similar mobility status or speed into the same group, and try to avoid the network to the terminal equipment with high mobility or high speed.
  • the paging results in unnecessary paging for terminal equipment with low mobility or low speed.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be implemented in the present application.
  • the implementation of the examples constitutes no limitation.
  • FIG. 8 shows a schematic diagram of another example of the method for paging of the present application, and the specific implementation steps of determining the group number are as follows:
  • the terminal device sends the second grouping parameter to the core network device, and the core network device receives the second grouping parameter sent by the terminal device, where the second grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • the second grouping parameter may be, but is not limited to, a parameter related to the service of the terminal device.
  • the service requirement level of the terminal equipment For example, there are currently three service demand levels of high, medium and low, and the terminal device UE1 determines the service demand level expected by itself as a high level.
  • the terminal device may determine the second grouping parameter based on any one or more of the following contents, that is, the information related to the grouping of the terminal device, including: a quality of service (Quality of Service, QoS) parameter of the service of the terminal device.
  • QoS Quality of Service
  • the packet delay budget Packet Delay Budget, PDB
  • the packet error rate Packet Error Rate, PER
  • the priority level Default Priority Level
  • the service type of the terminal device For example, enhanced Mobile Broadband (eMBB) service, Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication (URLLC) service, massive Machine Type of Communication (mMTC) service, etc. ; and/or the mobility state or movement speed of the terminal device, etc.
  • eMBB enhanced Mobile Broadband
  • URLLC Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication
  • mMTC massive Machine Type of Communication
  • the terminal device sends the desired grouping-related information to the core network device; the core network device accepts the desired grouping-related information of the terminal device.
  • the second grouping parameter is the service requirement level of the terminal device. Assuming that there are three service demand levels of high, medium, and low, the terminal device UE1 determines its expected service demand level as high, and sends the service demand level to the network device, and the network device receives the expected service demand level sent by the terminal device UE1. level of business needs.
  • the core network device updates and sends the updated second grouping parameter to the terminal device
  • the terminal device receives the updated second grouping parameter sent by the core network device
  • the second grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • the updated second grouping parameter may be, but is not limited to, a parameter related to the service of the terminal device.
  • the service requirement level of the terminal equipment For example, there are currently three service demand levels: high, medium, and low.
  • the terminal device UE1 determines its desired service demand level as high, and sends the service demand level to the network device.
  • the network device receives the second grouping information , it is considered that the expected second grouping parameter does not actually match the service demand level of the terminal equipment UE, so the network device will update the service demand level of the terminal equipment UE1 to medium, and notify the terminal equipment of the updated second grouping parameter.
  • the second grouping parameter is also used to determine the grouping of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may determine the updated second grouping parameter based on any one or more of the following contents, that is, the information related to the grouping of the terminal device, including: the quality of service (Quality of Service, QoS) parameter of the service of the terminal device.
  • the quality of service Quality of Service, QoS
  • the packet delay budget Packet Delay Budget, PDB
  • the packet error rate Packet Error Rate, PER
  • the priority level Default Priority Level
  • the service type of the terminal device For example, enhanced Mobile Broadband (eMBB) service, Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication (URLLC) service, massive Machine Type of Communication (mMTC) service, etc. ; and/or the mobility state or movement speed of the terminal device, etc.
  • eMBB enhanced Mobile Broadband
  • URLLC Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication
  • mMTC massive Machine Type of Communication
  • the core network device sends the second grouping parameter to the access network device, and the access network device receives the second grouping parameter sent by the core network device, where the second grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • the access network device when it sends paging to the terminal device, it will determine the grouping group number of the terminal device according to the second grouping parameter and the fourth grouping parameter, and then send the paging according to the grouping group number. Assuming that the access network device needs to page the terminal device UE1, and the grouping group number of UE1 is group 1, then the access network device only needs to page the group 1 where the terminal device UE1 belongs to send paging.
  • the core network device determines and sends a third grouping parameter to the access network device, and the access network device receives the third grouping parameter sent by the core network device, where the third grouping parameter is used to determine the fourth grouping parameter.
  • the third grouping parameter that is, the information related to the grouping of the terminal equipment may be, but not limited to, the parameters related to the service of the terminal equipment.
  • the information related to the UE grouping is the service requirement level, all possible level of business needs. For example, there are currently three service requirement levels, high, medium, and low, and the core network equipment divides the three service demand levels into three groups correspondingly.
  • the second grouping parameter is for the service demand level corresponding to the specific terminal device, for example, the service demand levels of UE1 and UE2 are respectively high and low.
  • the third grouping parameter is grouping-related information that the core network device classifies according to the service requirements of all terminal devices within its jurisdiction, and the information related to the UE grouping is the service requirement level. For example, the network equipment divides the service demand levels of all terminal equipment into three grades: high, medium, and low, and divides them into three groups correspondingly.
  • the third grouping parameter determines the fourth grouping parameter, wherein the fourth grouping parameter includes: a group number range or group number of the terminal device corresponding to each service requirement level.
  • the core network device when the core network device initiates paging to the terminal device, it sends the terminal device-specific information related to the terminal device grouping to the base station. For example, in the case where the information related to the grouping of the terminal equipment is the service demand level, the core network equipment can notify the base station of all possible service demand levels. Assume that the network equipment divides the service demand levels of all terminal equipment into three grades: high, medium and low, and divides them into three corresponding groups. The division rules and division results are sent to the base station as the third grouping parameter for the base station to use The third grouping parameter determines the fourth grouping parameter.
  • the terminal device may also send the second grouping information to the wireless access network device.
  • the access network device determines a fourth grouping parameter according to the third grouping parameter sent by the core network device, where the fourth grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • the fourth grouping parameter includes, but is not limited to: the group number range used by the terminal device corresponding to each service requirement level, and/or the group number.
  • the access network device may correspondingly divide the received terminal device into three groups: A group, B group, and C group according to the service level of the received terminal device: high, medium, and low, or the access network device corresponds to the The range of group numbers to which high, medium and low grade terminal devices belong are set to 0-2 groups, 3-4 groups and 5-7 groups respectively.
  • the access network device broadcasts the fourth grouping parameter to the terminal device, or the access network device sends the fourth grouping parameter to the terminal device through the radio resource control RRC message, and the terminal device receives the reception from the broadcast message or the radio resource control RRC message.
  • the fourth grouping parameter sent by the network access device where the fourth grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • the access network device can send the group number or group number range corresponding to each service requirement level, and the terminal device receives the group number corresponding to each service requirement level. number or group number range. Assume that the network equipment divides the service requirements of all terminal equipment into three grades: high, medium, and low, correspondingly divided into 6 groups, and the group number ranges are 0-2 groups, 3-4 groups, and 5 groups respectively. Then the wireless access network device can send the rule to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device determines a grouping group number according to the fourth grouping parameter sent by the access network device and the updated second grouping parameter, where the grouping group number is used for the network device to send paging.
  • the terminal device receives the group number or group number range corresponding to each service requirement level sent by the network device, and the terminal device receives the group number or group number range corresponding to each service requirement level.
  • the network equipment divides the service requirements of all terminal equipment into three grades: high, medium, and low, correspondingly divided into 6 groups, and the group number ranges are 0-2 groups, 3-4 groups, and 5 groups respectively.
  • the terminal device determines its own service demand level according to the second grouping parameter, and further confirms the group number to which it belongs.
  • the access network device determines a grouping group number according to the fourth grouping parameter and the updated second grouping parameter, where the grouping group number is used for the network device to send paging.
  • the core network (when paging the terminal equipment is initiated) sends the terminal equipment-specific information related to the terminal equipment grouping to the access network equipment, or the terminal equipment sends its own specific terminal equipment grouping related information. to the base station.
  • the core network (when paging the terminal equipment is initiated) sends the service demand level of the terminal equipment to the access network equipment, or the terminal equipment sends its own service demand level to the access network equipment.
  • the demand level is sent to the access network equipment.
  • the base station determines the grouping of the terminal device according to the specific information related to the terminal device grouping, and performs paging.
  • terminal devices with the same or similar characteristics can be grouped into the same group by negotiating information related to the terminal device grouping between the terminal device and the core network device according to the characteristics of the terminal device.
  • the terminal equipment grouping according to the service characteristics of the terminal equipment can group the terminal equipment with the same/similar service types or service requirements into the same group, try to ensure that the terminal equipment to be paged this time belongs to the same group, thereby reducing irrelevant The probability of being paged by the terminal equipment;
  • the terminal equipment grouping according to the mobile characteristics can group the terminal equipment with the same or similar mobility status or speed into the same group, and try to avoid the network to the terminal equipment with high mobility or high speed.
  • the paging results in unnecessary paging for terminal equipment with low mobility or low speed.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be implemented in the present application.
  • the implementation of the examples constitutes no limitation.
  • FIG. 9 shows a schematic diagram of another example of the method for paging of the present application, and the specific implementation steps of determining the group number are as follows:
  • the core network device sends the second grouping parameter to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the second grouping parameter sent by the core network device, where the second grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • the second grouping parameter may be, but is not limited to, a parameter related to the service of the terminal device.
  • the service requirement level of the terminal equipment For example, there are currently three service demand levels of high, medium and low, and the terminal device UE1 determines the service demand level expected by itself as a high level.
  • the terminal device may determine the second grouping parameter based on any one or more of the following contents, that is, the information related to the grouping of the terminal device, including: a quality of service (Quality of Service, QoS) parameter of the service of the terminal device.
  • QoS Quality of Service
  • the packet delay budget Packet Delay Budget, PDB
  • the packet error rate Packet Error Rate, PER
  • the priority level Default Priority Level
  • the service type of the terminal device For example, enhanced Mobile Broadband (eMBB) service, Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication (URLLC) service, massive Machine Type of Communication (mMTC) service, etc. ; and/or the mobility state or movement speed of the terminal device, etc.
  • eMBB enhanced Mobile Broadband
  • URLLC Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication
  • mMTC massive Machine Type of Communication
  • the core network device determines the service requirement level of the terminal device, and directly sends the second grouping parameter to the terminal device.
  • the second grouping parameter is the service requirement level of the terminal device. Assuming that there are three service demand levels of high, medium and low, the network device determines the service demand level of UE1 as high according to the service-related parameters of the terminal device, and sends the service demand level to the terminal device. The service requirement level sent by the network device is high, the two reach a consensus, and the second grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping of the terminal device.
  • the core network device sends the second grouping parameter to the access network device, and the access network device receives the second grouping parameter sent by the core network device, where the second grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • the access network device when it sends paging to the terminal device, it will determine the grouping group number of the terminal device according to the second grouping parameter and the fourth grouping parameter, and then send the paging according to the grouping group number. Assuming that the access network device needs to page the terminal device UE1, and the grouping group number of the UE1 is group 1, the access network device only needs to page the group 1 where the terminal device UE1 is located.
  • the core network device determines and sends a third grouping parameter to the access network device, and the access network device receives the third grouping parameter sent by the core network device, where the third grouping parameter is used to determine the fourth grouping parameter.
  • the third grouping parameter that is, the information related to the grouping of the terminal equipment may be, but not limited to, the parameters related to the service of the terminal equipment.
  • the information related to the UE grouping is the service requirement level, all possible level of business needs. For example, there are currently three service requirement levels, high, medium, and low, and the core network equipment divides the three service demand levels into three groups correspondingly.
  • the second grouping parameter is for the service demand level corresponding to the specific terminal device, for example, the service demand levels of UE1 and UE2 are respectively high and low.
  • the third grouping parameter is grouping-related information that the core network device classifies according to the service requirements of all terminal devices within its jurisdiction, and the information related to the UE grouping is the service requirement level. For example, the network equipment divides the service demand levels of all terminal equipment into three grades: high, medium, and low, and divides them into three groups correspondingly.
  • the third grouping parameter determines the fourth grouping parameter, wherein the fourth grouping parameter includes: the group number range and/or group number of the terminal device corresponding to each service requirement level.
  • the core network device when the core network device initiates paging to the terminal device, it sends the terminal device-specific information related to the terminal device grouping to the base station. For example, in the case where the information related to the grouping of the terminal equipment is the service requirement level, the core network equipment may notify the base station of all possible service requirement levels. Assume that the network equipment divides the service demand levels of all terminal equipment into three grades: high, medium and low, and divides them into three corresponding groups. The division rules and division results are sent to the base station as the third grouping parameter for the base station to use The third grouping parameter determines the fourth grouping parameter.
  • the terminal device may also send the second grouping information to the wireless access network device.
  • the access network device determines a fourth grouping parameter according to the third grouping parameter sent by the core network device, where the fourth grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • the fourth grouping parameter includes, but is not limited to: the group number range used by the terminal device corresponding to each service requirement level, and/or the group number.
  • the access network device may correspondingly divide the received terminal device into three groups: A group, B group, and C group according to the service level of the received terminal device: high, medium, and low, or the access network device corresponds to the The range of group numbers to which high, medium and low grade terminal devices belong are set to 0-2 groups, 3-4 groups and 5-7 groups respectively.
  • the access network device broadcasts the fourth grouping parameter to the terminal device, or the access network device sends the fourth grouping parameter to the terminal device through an RRC message, and the terminal device receives the transmission from the access network device from the broadcast message or the radio resource control RRC message.
  • the fourth grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • the access network device can send the group number or group number range corresponding to each service requirement level, and the terminal device receives the group number corresponding to each service requirement level. number or group number range. Assume that the network equipment divides the service requirements of all terminal equipment into three grades: high, medium, and low, correspondingly divided into 6 groups, and the group number ranges are 0-2 groups, 3-4 groups, and 5 groups respectively. Then the wireless access network device can send the rule to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device determines a grouping group number according to the second grouping parameter and the fourth grouping parameter, where the grouping group number is used for the network device to send paging.
  • the terminal device receives the group number or group number range corresponding to each service requirement level sent by the network device, and the terminal device receives the group number or group number range corresponding to each service requirement level.
  • the network equipment divides the service requirements of all terminal equipment into three grades: high, medium, and low, correspondingly divided into 6 groups, and the group number ranges are 0-2 groups, 3-4 groups, and 5 groups respectively.
  • the terminal device determines its own service demand level according to the second grouping parameter, and further confirms the group number to which it belongs.
  • the access network device determines a grouping group number according to the second grouping parameter and the fourth grouping parameter, where the grouping group number is used for the network device to send paging.
  • the core network (when paging the terminal equipment is initiated) sends the terminal equipment-specific information related to the terminal equipment grouping to the access network equipment, or the terminal equipment sends its own specific terminal equipment grouping related information. to the base station.
  • the core network (when paging the terminal equipment is initiated) sends the service demand level of the terminal equipment to the access network equipment, or the terminal equipment sends its own service demand level to the access network equipment.
  • the demand level is sent to the access network equipment.
  • the base station determines the grouping of the terminal device according to the specific information related to the terminal device grouping, and performs paging.
  • terminal devices with the same or similar characteristics can be grouped into the same group by negotiating information related to the terminal device grouping between the terminal device and the core network device according to the characteristics of the terminal device.
  • the terminal equipment grouping according to the service characteristics of the terminal equipment can group the terminal equipment with the same/similar service types or service requirements into the same group, try to ensure that the terminal equipment to be paged this time belongs to the same group, thereby reducing irrelevant The probability of being paged by the terminal equipment;
  • the terminal equipment grouping according to the mobile characteristics can group the terminal equipment with the same or similar mobility status or speed into the same group, and try to avoid the network to the terminal equipment with high mobility or high speed.
  • the paging results in unnecessary paging for terminal equipment with low mobility or low speed.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be implemented in the present application.
  • the implementation of the examples constitutes no limitation.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a paging apparatus 1000 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus 1000 may be a network device, or a chip or a circuit, such as a chip or a circuit that can be provided in the network device.
  • the apparatus 1000 may include a processor 1010, and optionally, a memory 1020.
  • the memory 1020 is used to store instructions.
  • the processor 1010 is configured to execute the instructions stored in the memory 1020, so that the apparatus 1000 implements the steps performed by the network device in the above method.
  • the apparatus 1000 may further include an input port 1030 (ie, an example of a paging unit) and an output port 1040 (ie, another example of a transceiver unit).
  • the processor 1010, the memory 1020, the input port 1030 and the output port 1040 can page each other through the internal connection path to transmit control and/or data signals.
  • the memory 1020 is used to store a computer program, and the processor 1010 can be used to call and run the computer program from the memory 1020 to complete the steps of the network device in the above method.
  • the memory 1020 may be integrated in the processor 1010, or may be provided separately from the processor 1010.
  • the input port 1030 may be a receiver
  • the output port 1040 may be a transmitter.
  • the receiver and the transmitter may be the same or different physical entities. When they are the same physical entity, they can be collectively referred to as transceivers.
  • the input port 1030 is an input interface
  • the output port 1040 is an output interface
  • the functions of the input port 1030 and the output port 1040 can be considered to be implemented by a transceiver circuit or a dedicated chip for transceiver.
  • the processor 1010 can be considered to be implemented by a dedicated processing chip, a processing circuit, a processor or a general-purpose chip.
  • a general-purpose computer may be used to implement the network device provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the program codes that will implement the functions of the processor 1010, the input port 1030 and the output port 1040 are stored in the memory 1020, and the general-purpose processor implements the functions of the processor 1010, the input port 1030 and the output port 1040 by executing the codes in the memory 1020.
  • the core network device includes a processor, a memory, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process paging protocols and paging data, control terminal equipment, execute software programs, and process data of software programs.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the input and output devices are used to receive data from other devices (eg, access network devices or other core network devices), and/or send data to other devices.
  • the processor with processing function can be regarded as the processor 1010 of the terminal device.
  • the processor 1010 may also be referred to as a processor, a processing board, a processing module, a processing device, or the like.
  • a receiver, a receiver, a receiving circuit, etc. can be regarded as the input port 1030 .
  • a transmitter, transmitter, or transmitting circuit, etc. may be considered as the output port 1040 .
  • the chip When the paging apparatus 1000 is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver circuit and a processing circuit.
  • the transceiver circuit may be an input/output circuit or a paging interface;
  • the processing circuit may be a processor, a microprocessor or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
  • the input circuit can be an input pin
  • the output circuit can be an output pin
  • the processing circuit can be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits.
  • the input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver, the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to and transmitted by a transmitter, and the input circuit and output
  • the circuits can be different circuits or the same circuit, in which case the circuit is used as an input circuit and an output circuit respectively at different times.
  • the output port 1040 is used to send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to determine the type of the first paging, and the type of the first paging includes: non-repetitive paging or repetitive paging .
  • the output port 1040 is specifically used for:
  • the first indication information is sent, and the first indication information is used to determine that the type of the first paging is repeated paging.
  • the output port 1040 is further used for:
  • the same first indication information is sent, and the first indication information is used to determine the type of the first page, and the first page is any one of the multiple pages. .
  • the input port 1030 is configured to receive first information, where the first information is staying probability information of the terminal device on one or more cells where it is camped/visited, and the first information is used to determine the terminal device The paging range of the device, which is used by the network device to send pages.
  • the storage unit 1020 is used for storing the staying/visited cell staying probability information.
  • the processor 1010 is configured to determine the paging range of the terminal device according to the first information.
  • the output port 1040 is used for sending paging according to the paging range, and the paging is used for paging the terminal equipment.
  • processor 1010 is specifically used for:
  • the core network determines the paging range according to the first information; or,
  • the access network determines the paging range according to the first information; or,
  • the core network If the core network receives the first information and the access network sends paging, the core network sends the terminal equipment data and the first information to the last serving gNB of the terminal equipment, the last serving base station last serving The gNB determines the paging range according to the first information.
  • the output port 1040 is configured to send a first grouping parameter, where the first grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group numbers of the RRC_IDLE terminal equipment in the radio resource control idle state and the RRC_INACTIVE terminal equipment in the radio resource control inactive state, The group number is used by the network device to send paging.
  • the processor 1010 is used for sending paging according to the grouping group number, and the paging is used for paging the terminal equipment.
  • the output port 1040 is used to broadcast the first grouping parameter; or,
  • the first grouping parameter is sent through a radio resource control RRC message.
  • the output port 1040 is specifically used for:
  • the network device broadcasts RRC_IDLE and RRC_INACTIVE the range of group numbers used by the UE.
  • the group ID range of idle UE is 0 ⁇ M
  • the group ID range of inactive UE is M+1 ⁇ N;
  • the network device broadcasts the RRC_IDLE or RRC_INACTIVE group number offset (offset) used by the UE.
  • the group number offset of idle UE or inactive UE is M;
  • the network device can configure the first grouping parameter of the inactive UE in the RRC message, for example, the group number range of the inactive UE or the group number offset, etc.
  • the input port 1030 is configured to receive a second grouping parameter sent by the terminal device, for example, the service requirement level of the terminal device, and the second grouping parameter is used to determine The grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • the output port 1040 is configured to send the second grouping parameter to the access network device, where the second grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • the output port 1040 is used to send the third grouping parameter to the access network device, the third grouping parameter is used to determine the fourth grouping parameter, the fourth grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device, the fourth grouping parameter and the The second grouping parameter is used for the access network device to send paging.
  • the input port 1030 is further configured not to receive the second grouping parameter sent by the terminal device.
  • the output port 1040 is further configured to send the updated second grouping parameter, the updated second grouping parameter is determined according to the second grouping parameter sent by the terminal device, and the second grouping parameter is used to determine the terminal device. group number.
  • the processor 1010 is configured to determine a second grouping parameter, where the second grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • the output port 1040 is further configured to send the second grouping parameter to the terminal device.
  • the input port 1030 is used for receiving the second grouping parameter, and the second grouping parameter is used for determining the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • the input port 1030 is further configured to receive the third grouping parameter sent by the core network device, where the third grouping parameter is used to determine the fourth grouping parameter.
  • the processor 1010 is configured to determine the fourth grouping parameter according to the third grouping parameter.
  • the output port 1040 is used to send the fourth grouping parameter to the terminal device, where the fourth grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • the output port 1040 is used to broadcast the fourth grouping parameter to the terminal device.
  • the fourth grouping parameter is sent through a radio resource control RRC message.
  • modules or units in the apparatus 1000 listed above are only exemplary descriptions.
  • the modules or units in the apparatus 1000 can be used to execute the above method.
  • Each action or process performed by the core network equipment is omitted.
  • FIG. 10 the structure of the apparatus 1000 illustrated in FIG. 10 is only a possible form, and should not constitute any limitation to the embodiments of the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of other forms of network device structures that may appear in the future.
  • the terminal device 1000 may correspond to the first terminal device that transmits control information in the foregoing method embodiments, and the above-mentioned and other management operations and/or functions of each module in the terminal device 1000 are respectively for the purpose of realizing the foregoing Corresponding steps of each method, therefore, the beneficial effects in the foregoing method embodiments can also be achieved.
  • processing module in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented by a processor, and the transceiver module may be implemented by a transceiver.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a paging apparatus 1100 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus 1100 may be a terminal device, and may also be a chip or a circuit, such as a chip or a circuit that can be provided in the terminal device.
  • the apparatus 1100 may include a processor 1110, and optionally, a storage unit 1120.
  • the storage unit 1120 is used to store instructions.
  • the processor 1110 is configured to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit 1120, so that the apparatus 1100 implements the steps performed by a terminal device (eg, terminal device 120 or terminal device 230) in the above method.
  • a terminal device eg, terminal device 120 or terminal device 230
  • the apparatus 1100 may further include an input port 1130 (ie, an example of a paging unit) and an output port 114 (ie, another example of a transceiver unit).
  • the processor 1110, the storage unit 1120, the input port 1130 and the output port 1140 can page each other through the internal connection path to transmit control and/or data signals.
  • the storage unit 1120 is used to store a computer program, and the processor 1110 can be used to call and run the computer program from the storage unit 1120 to complete the steps of the terminal device in the above method.
  • the storage unit 1120 may be integrated in the processor 1110, or may be provided separately from the processor 1110.
  • the input port 1130 may be a receiver
  • the output port 1140 may be a transmitter.
  • the receiver and the transmitter may be the same or different physical entities. When they are the same physical entity, they can be collectively referred to as transceivers.
  • the input port 1130 is an input interface
  • the output port 1140 is an output interface
  • the functions of the input port 1130 and the output port 1140 can be considered to be implemented by a transceiver circuit or a dedicated chip for transceiver.
  • the processor 1110 can be considered to be implemented by a dedicated processing chip, a processing circuit, a processor or a general-purpose chip.
  • a general-purpose computer may be used to implement the terminal device provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the program codes that will implement the functions of the processor 1110, the input port 1130 and the output port 1140 are stored in the storage unit 1120, and the general-purpose processor implements the functions of the processor 1110, the input port 1130 and the output port 1140 by executing the codes in the storage unit 1120. .
  • the terminal device When the apparatus 1100 is a terminal device, the terminal device includes a processor, a storage unit, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process paging protocols and paging data, control terminal equipment, execute software programs, and process data of software programs.
  • the storage unit is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of the baseband signal and the radio frequency signal and the processing of the radio frequency signal.
  • Antennas are mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of terminal equipment may not have input and output devices.
  • the processor When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal through the antenna in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, which converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • the storage unit may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device or the like. The storage unit may be set independently of the processor, or may be integrated with the processor, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor with processing function can be regarded as the processor 1110 of the terminal device.
  • the processor 1110 may also be referred to as a processor, a processing board, a processing module, a processing device, or the like.
  • a receiver, a receiver, or a receiving circuit can be regarded as the input port 1130 .
  • a transmitter, transmitter or transmit circuit, etc. may be considered as the output port 1140 .
  • the chip When the paging device 1100 is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver circuit and a processing circuit.
  • the transceiver circuit may be an input/output circuit or a paging interface;
  • the processing circuit may be a processor, a microprocessor or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
  • the input circuit can be an input pin, the output circuit can be an output pin, and the processing circuit can be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits.
  • the input signal received by the input circuit may be, but not limited to, received and input by the receiver, the signal output by the output circuit may be, but not limited to, output to and transmitted by the transmitter, and the input circuit and the output circuit may be Different circuits can also be the same circuit. In this case, the circuit is used as an input circuit and an output circuit at different times.
  • the input port 1130 is used to receive first indication information from the network device, where the first indication information is used to determine the type of the first paging, and the type of the first paging includes: non-repetitive paging or Repeat paging.
  • the processor 1110 is configured to determine the type of the first paging according to the first indication information.
  • the processor 1110 is configured to determine whether to receive or not to receive the first page according to the type of the first page.
  • processor 1110 is specifically used for:
  • the type of the first paging is non-repetitive paging, receive the first paging; or,
  • the first paging is not received.
  • processor 1110 is specifically used for:
  • the first paging is received; or,
  • the first paging is not received.
  • processor 1110 is specifically used for:
  • the first indication information of the first paging is different from the first indication information received last time, it is determined that the type of the first paging is non-repetitive paging, and the first paging is received; or,
  • the first indication information of the first paging is the same as the first indication information received last time, it is determined that the type of the first paging is repeated paging, and the first paging is not received.
  • the input port 1130 is used to receive a wake-up signal WUS from the network device, and the wake-up signal WUS is used to determine whether to receive or not to receive the first page.
  • the processing unit 1110 is configured to determine whether to receive or not to receive the first paging according to the wake-up signal WUS and the first indication information.
  • the processing unit 1110 is specifically used for:
  • the terminal device If the WUS indicates that the terminal device needs to receive the first page, if the first page is a newly sent page, the terminal device receives the first page; if the first page is a repeatedly sent page, the terminal device Receive the first paging if the paging has been received;
  • the terminal device directly does not receive the first page; or, receives the first page.
  • the output port 1140 is used to send the first information to the network device.
  • the cell information includes but is not limited to cell identification information, information about the staying probability of the terminal device in the cell, specific time information, and the like.
  • the processing unit 1110 is configured to determine first information, where the first information is staying probability information of the terminal device on one or more cells where it is camped/visited, the first information is used to determine the paging range of the terminal device, the The paging range is used by network devices to send pages.
  • the input port 1130 is used to receive the page sent by the network device, and the page is used to page the terminal device.
  • the output port 1140 is specifically used for: sending the first information, including:
  • the first information is sent to the core network and/or the radio access network.
  • the input port 1130 is configured to receive a first grouping parameter (eg, group number range, group number offset, etc.) sent by the network device, where the first grouping parameter is used to determine the RRC idle state The grouping group number of the RRC_IDLE terminal equipment and the RRC_INACTIVE terminal equipment in the RRC inactive state.
  • a first grouping parameter eg, group number range, group number offset, etc.
  • the input port 1130 is specifically used for:
  • the first grouping parameter is received from a radio resource control RRC message.
  • the processing unit 1110 is configured to determine the grouping group number according to the first grouping parameter, where the grouping group number is used for the network device to send paging.
  • the input port 1130 is also used to receive the page, which is used to page the terminal device.
  • the processing unit 1110 is used for the RRC_IDLE terminal device to determine the grouping group number according to the first group number range or the first group number offset; or, the RRC_INACTIVE terminal device according to the second group number range or the second group number offset
  • the shift amount determines the group number of the group.
  • processing unit 1110 is used to:
  • the RRC_IDLE terminal device determines the group number according to the first group number range or the first group number offset; or,
  • the RRC_INACTIVE terminal device determines the group number according to the second group number range or the second offset of the group number.
  • processing unit 1110 is specifically configured to:
  • the terminal device determines its own grouping group number according to the group number range. For example, if the group ID of the idle UE ranges from 0 to M, the group ID finally used by the idle UE needs to be in the range of 0 to M.
  • the terminal device determines its own grouping group number according to the group number offset. For example, if the group ID offset of the idle UE is W, the terminal device needs to use the group ID offset when calculating the final group ID used.
  • the terminal device determines that its group number is within the range of the group number, or uses the group number offset to determine its own group number.
  • the output port 1140 is configured to send the second grouping parameter to the network device, for example, the terminal device sends its own service requirement level to the network device.
  • the input port 1130 is used for receiving the fourth grouping parameter sent by the access network device, where the fourth grouping parameter is used for the terminal device to determine the grouping group number.
  • the input port 1130 is specifically used for:
  • the first grouping parameter sent by the access network device is received from the radio resource control RRC message.
  • the processing unit 1110 is configured to determine the grouping group number according to the second grouping parameter and the fourth grouping parameter.
  • the core network device does not receive the second grouping parameter sent by the terminal device
  • the output port 1140 is used to send the updated second grouping parameter; or,
  • the input port 1130 is used for receiving the updated second grouping parameter sent by the core network device, where the second grouping parameter is used for the terminal device to determine the grouping group number.
  • the input port 1130 is further configured to receive a second grouping parameter sent by the core network device, where the second grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • modules or units in the apparatus 1100 listed above are only exemplary descriptions.
  • the modules or units in the apparatus 1100 can be used to perform the above-mentioned methods.
  • Each action or process performed by the terminal device is omitted.
  • FIG. 11 It should be understood that the structure of the apparatus 1100 illustrated in FIG. 11 is only a possible form, and should not constitute any limitation to the embodiments of the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of other forms of terminal equipment that may appear in the future.
  • the network device 1100 may correspond to the first network device that transmits control information in the foregoing method embodiments, and the above-mentioned and other management operations and/or functions of each module in the network device 1100 are for realizing the foregoing Corresponding steps of each method, therefore, the beneficial effects in the foregoing method embodiments can also be achieved.
  • processing module in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented by a processor, and the transceiver module may be implemented by a transceiver.
  • FIG. 12 is a structural block diagram of a terminal device 1200 provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device 1200 shown in FIG. 12 includes: a processor 1210 , a memory 1220 and a transceiver 1230 .
  • the processor 1210, the memory 1220 and the transceiver 1230 communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transmit control and/or data signals.
  • the processor 1210, the memory 1220, and the transceiver 1230 may be implemented in a chip.
  • the memory 1220 may store program codes, and the processor 1210 calls the program codes stored in the memory 1220 to implement corresponding functions of the terminal device.
  • the processor 1210 is configured to determine the type of the first paging according to the first indication information.
  • the processor 1210 is configured to determine the grouping group number according to the first grouping parameter, where the grouping group number is used for the network device to send paging.
  • the processor 1210 is configured for the RRC_IDLE terminal equipment to determine the grouping group number according to the first group number range or the first group number offset; or, the RRC_INACTIVE terminal equipment according to the second group number range or the first group number range. 2.
  • the group number offset determines the grouping group number.
  • the processor 1210 is configured to determine whether to receive or not to receive the first page according to the type of the first page.
  • the processor 1210 is specifically used for:
  • the terminal device If the WUS indicates that the terminal device needs to receive the first page, if the first page is a newly sent page, the terminal device receives the first page; if the first page is a repeatedly sent page, the terminal device Receive the first paging if the paging has been received;
  • the terminal device directly does not receive the first page; or, receives the first page.
  • the transceiver 1230 receives first indication information from the network device, where the first indication information is used to determine the type of the first paging, and the type of the first paging includes: non-repeated paging or repeated paging.
  • a wake-up signal WUS is received from the network device through the transceiver 1230, and the wake-up signal WUS is used to determine whether to receive or not to receive the first page.
  • the first information is sent to the network device through the transceiver 1230 .
  • the cell information includes but is not limited to cell identification information, information on the staying probability of the terminal device in the cell, specific time information, and the like.
  • the transceiver 1230 receives a first grouping parameter (eg, group number range, group number offset, etc.) sent by the network device, where the first grouping parameter is used to determine the radio resource control idle state RRC_IDLE terminal device and radio resources Controls the grouping group number of the inactive RRC_INACTIVE terminal device.
  • a first grouping parameter eg, group number range, group number offset, etc.
  • the terminal device 1200 may also include other devices, such as input devices, output devices, batteries, and the like.
  • the memory 1220 may store some or all of the instructions for performing the methods performed by the terminal device in the aforementioned methods.
  • the processor 1210 can execute the instructions stored in the memory 1220 in combination with other hardware (eg, the transceiver 1230 ) to complete the steps performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method.
  • other hardware eg, the transceiver 1230
  • FIG. 13 is a structural block diagram of a network device 1300 provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 1300 shown in FIG. 13 includes: a processor 1310 , a memory 1320 and a transceiver 1330 .
  • the processor 1310, the memory 1320 and the transceiver 1330 communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transmit control and/or data signals.
  • the processor 1310, memory 1320, and transceiver 1330 may be implemented in a chip.
  • the memory 1320 may store program codes, and the processor 1310 invokes the program codes stored in the memory 1320 to implement corresponding functions of the network device.
  • the processor 1310 is used to:
  • the core network determines a paging range according to the first information; or,
  • the access network determines a paging range based on the first information; or,
  • the core network If the core network receives the first information and the access network sends the paging, the core network sends the terminal equipment data and the first information to the last serving gNB of the terminal equipment, The last serving gNB determines the paging range according to the first information.
  • the processor 1310 is configured to determine a second grouping parameter, where the second grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • the processor 1310 is configured to determine the paging range of the terminal device according to the first information.
  • the processor 1310 is configured to determine the fourth grouping parameter according to the third grouping parameter.
  • the transceiver 1330 sends first indication information, where the first indication information is used to determine the type of the first paging, where the type of the first paging includes: non-repetitive paging or repetitive paging.
  • First information is received through the transceiver 1330, where the first information is the staying probability information of the terminal device on one or more cells where it is camped/visited, and the first information is used to determine the paging range of the terminal device , the paging range is used for the network device to send paging.
  • the first grouping parameter is sent through the transceiver 1330, and the first grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group numbers of the RRC_IDLE terminal equipment in the radio resource control idle state and the RRC_INACTIVE terminal equipment in the radio resource control inactive state. Send a page to a network device.
  • the first grouping parameter is broadcast through the transceiver 1330; or, the first grouping parameter is sent through a radio resource control RRC message.
  • the transceiver 1330 receives the second grouping parameter sent by the terminal device, for example, the service requirement level of the terminal device, where the second grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • a second grouping parameter is sent to the access network device through the transceiver 1330, where the second grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal device.
  • the third grouping parameter is used to determine the fourth grouping parameter
  • the fourth grouping parameter is used to determine the grouping group number of the terminal equipment
  • the grouping group number is used Send paging to access network equipment.
  • the network device 1300 may also include other devices, such as input devices, output devices, batteries, and the like.
  • the memory 1320 may store some or all of the instructions for performing the methods performed by the network device in the aforementioned methods.
  • the processor 1310 can execute the instructions stored in the memory 1320 in combination with other hardware (eg, the transceiver 1330 ) to complete the steps performed by the network device in the foregoing method.
  • other hardware eg, the transceiver 1330
  • the network device chip implements the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the network device chip receives the above-mentioned uplink shared channel and uplink data from other modules (such as radio frequency modules or antennas) in the network device.
  • the uplink shared channel and downlink data are sent by the terminal device to the network device.
  • the terminal device chip implements the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the terminal device chip sends the above-mentioned uplink shared channel and downlink data from other modules (such as radio frequency modules or antennas) in the terminal device.
  • a processor may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities.
  • each step of the above-mentioned method can be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor can be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), an off-the-shelf programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other available Programming logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, may also be a system on chip (SoC), a central processor unit (CPU), or a network processor (network processor).
  • SoC system on chip
  • CPU central processor unit
  • network processor network processor
  • processor NP
  • DSP digital signal processing circuit
  • MCU microcontroller unit
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • Software modules can be located in random access memory (RAM), flash memory, read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, etc. in the storage medium.
  • RAM random access memory
  • ROM read-only memory
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the instructions in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic Random access memory
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • serial link DRAM SLDRAM
  • direct memory bus random access memory direct rambus RAM, DR RAM
  • the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any other combination.
  • the above-described embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions or computer programs. When the computer instructions or computer programs are loaded or executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, or the like that contains a set of one or more available media.
  • the usable media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, DVDs), or semiconductor media.
  • the semiconductor medium may be a solid state drive.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be dealt with in the embodiments of the present application. implementation constitutes any limitation.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or paging connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or paging connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: a U disk, a removable hard disk, a read-only storage unit, a random access storage unit, a magnetic disk or an optical disk and other media that can store program codes.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供了一种用于寻呼的方法和装置，该方法包括：接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示消息用于确定第一寻呼的类型；根据所述第一指示信息确定第一寻呼的类型，所述第一寻呼的类型包括：非重复寻呼或重复寻呼；根据所述第一寻呼的类型确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼。本申请实施例的用于寻呼的方法，能够使终端设备根据第一指示信息确定第一寻呼的类型，并根据第一寻呼的类型确定接收或不接收第一寻呼，从而减少不相关的终端设备因重复接收不必要的寻呼而造成的额外功耗，降低寻呼虚警。

Description

用于寻呼的方法和装置 技术领域
本申请实施例涉及通信领域，并且更具体地，涉及一种用于寻呼的方法和装置。
背景技术
网络可以通过寻呼来通知用户设备(User Equipment,UE)接收寻呼消息；或者，网络可以通过寻呼向UE发送短消息以指示系统信息更新或地震海啸预警/商业移动告警。
按照协议规定，用户设备根据UE标识信息和寻呼相关的参数计算自己的寻呼时机(Paging Occasion,PO)位置，在每个寻呼周期内监听PO，以确定网络是否进行了寻呼。
然而，可能存在多个UE监听同一PO的情况。当网络在PO内发起寻呼时，该PO内的所有UE都会监听、接收并解码寻呼信息。对于网络实际并没有寻呼的UE来说，每次无区别地重复监听、接收并解码不必要的寻呼消息会产生额外的功耗。因此，如何减少降低寻呼虚警是目前亟待解决的问题。
发明内容
本申请提供了用于寻呼的方法和装置，能够尽量避免不相关的终端设备重复接收相同的寻呼，从而减少不必要的功耗，降低寻呼虚警。
第一方面，提供一种寻呼方法，包括：接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示消息用于确定第一寻呼的类型，所述第一寻呼的类型包括：非重复寻呼或重复寻呼；根据所述第一指示信息确定第一寻呼的类型；根据所述第一寻呼的类型确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼。
根据本申请提供的方案，通过终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息，终端设备能够确定第一寻呼的类型。终端设备再根据之前接收寻呼的情况，能够确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼。只有确保终端设备在没有接收过该寻呼的情况下，终端设备才接收所述第一寻呼，所以不需要每次都无区别地重复接收相同的寻呼，从而减少因不必要的寻呼接收造成的额外功耗，降低寻呼虚警。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，该第一指示信息承载于参考信号中。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该指示信息可以承载于下行控制信息(Downlink Control Information,DCI)，物理层信号/序列(sequence)，媒体接入控制(Media Access Control,MAC)控制元(Control Element,CE)，或无限资源控制(Radio Resource Control,RRC)消息等。其中，具体承载的信令或消息可以是唤醒信号(Wake Up Signal,WUS)，寻呼DCI，寻呼消息等。
通过上述发送指示信息的方法，可以利用充分现有的DCI、MAC CE或者RRC等信令向终端设备发送第一指示信息。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，重复寻呼满足：
如果第一寻呼的消息内容与第二寻呼的消息内容相同，所述第一寻呼为重复寻呼，所 述第二寻呼是在所述第一寻呼之前发送的寻呼；或者，
如果第一寻呼的终端设备属于第二寻呼的终端设备，所述第一寻呼为重复寻呼，所述第二寻呼是在所述第一寻呼之前发送的寻呼。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，所述根据所述第一寻呼的类型确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼，包括：
如果所述第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼，接收所述第一寻呼；或者，
如果所述第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，不接收所述第一寻呼。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，所述根据所述第一寻呼的类型确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼，还包括：
如果所述第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，且在所述第一寻呼之前未接收过寻呼，接收所述第一寻呼；或者，
如果所述第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，且在所述第一寻呼之前已接收过寻呼，不接收所述第一寻呼。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，所述在所述第一寻呼之前未接收过寻呼，包括：
在所述第一寻呼之前的第一时间内，和/或在当前驻留的服务小区上未接收过寻呼；或者，
在所述第一寻呼之前未接收过与所述第一寻呼相同的寻呼。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，所述在所述第一寻呼之前已接收过寻呼，包括：
在所述第一寻呼之前的第一时间内，和/或在当前驻留的服务小区上已接收过寻呼；或者，
在所述第一寻呼之前已接收过与所述第一寻呼相同的寻呼。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，所述根据所述第一寻呼类型确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼，还包括：
如果第一寻呼的第一指示信息与上一次接收的第一指示信息不同，确定所述第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼，接收所述第一寻呼；或者，
如果第一寻呼的第一指示信息与上一次接收的第一指示信息相同，确定所述第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，不接收所述第一寻呼。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，所述方法还包括：
接收唤醒信号WUS，所述唤醒信号WUS用于确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼；
根据所述唤醒信号WUS和所述第一指示信息确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼。
经过上述技术方案，通过区分第一寻呼是否为新寻呼或重复寻呼，以避免不相关终端重复接收相同的寻呼。终端设备通过接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息，能够确定第一寻呼的类型。终端设备再根据之前接收寻呼的情况，能够确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼。只有确保终端设备在没有接收过该寻呼的情况下才接收所述第一寻呼，而不需要每次都无区别地重复接收相同的寻呼，从而减少不必要的寻呼接收造成的额外功耗，降低寻呼虚警。
第二方面，提供一种寻呼方法，包括：网络设备确定第一寻呼的类型，然后向终端设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于确定第一寻呼的类型，所述第一寻呼的类型 包括：非重复寻呼或重复寻呼。
根据本申请提供的方案，通过网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息，指示第一寻呼的类型。终端设备接收第一指示信息后确定第一寻呼的类型，再根据之前接收寻呼的情况，能够确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼。终端设备只有在确保终端设备在没有接收过该寻呼的情况下才接收所述第一寻呼，而不需要每次都无区别地重复接收寻呼，从而减少不必要的寻呼接收造成的额外功耗，降低寻呼虚警。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，该第一指示信息承载于参考信号中。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，在某些可能的实现方式中，该指示信息可以承载于下行控制信息DCI，物理层信号/序列(sequence)，MAC CE，或无限资源控制RRC消息等。其中，具体承载的信令或消息可以是唤醒信号WUS，寻呼DCI，寻呼消息等。
通过上述发送指示信息的方法，可以利用充分现有的DCI、MAC CE或者RRC等信令向终端设备发送第一指示信息。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，所述重复寻呼满足：
如果第一寻呼的消息内容与第二寻呼的消息内容相同，所述第一寻呼为重复寻呼，所述第二寻呼是在所述第一寻呼之前发送的寻呼；或者，
如果第一寻呼的终端设备属于第二寻呼的终端设备，所述第一寻呼为重复寻呼，所述第二寻呼是在所述第一寻呼之前发送的寻呼。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，所述发送第一指示信息，包括：
如果所述第一寻呼类型为非重复寻呼，发送所述第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于确定所述第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼；或者，
如果所述第一寻呼类型为重复寻呼，发送所述第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于确定所述第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，所述发送第一指示信息，还包括：
如果多个寻呼为相同的寻呼，发送相同的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于确定第一寻呼的类型，所述第一寻呼是多个寻呼中的任意一个寻呼。
经过上述技术方案，通过区分寻呼是否为新寻呼或重复寻呼，以避免不相关终端重复接收相同寻呼。终端设备通过接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息，能够确定第一寻呼的类型。终端设备再根据之前接收寻呼的情况，能够确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼，只有确保终端设备在没有接收过该寻呼的情况下才接收所述第一寻呼，而不需要每次都无区别地重复接收寻呼，从而减少不必要的寻呼接收造成的额外功耗，降低寻呼虚警。
第三方面，提供一种通信方法，包括：终端设备确定第一信息，所述第一信息包括：终端设备驻留/访问过的一个或多个小区标识信息和第二信息，所述第二信息是终端设备在驻留/访问的一个或多个小区上的停留概率信息；终端设备发送所述第一信息。
根据本申请提供的方案，终端设备通过上报自己驻留或访问的小区信息，包括小区标识信息，在一个或多个小区上的停留概率信息，以及具体的时间信息等。网络设备基于终端设备上报的驻留/访问小区信息，在需要对终端设备发起寻呼时，能够确定出(当前)终端设备可能或高概率停留的小区，因此可优先在终端设备可能或较大概率会停留的一个或多个小区内发起寻呼，一方面优化了寻呼范围，使得寻呼更加精准，避免在过大的范围 内寻呼，可减少对不相关的终端设备的影响；另一方面也提高了对该终端设备寻呼的成功概率，尽量避免出现需要在不同范围内多次寻呼终端设备的情况。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，所述第一信息，包括：
在第一时段内，所述终端设备在一个或多个小区上的停留概率信息；或者，
在第一小区上，所述终端设备在多个时段内的停留概率信息。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，所述发送所述第一信息，包括：向核心网和/或无线接入网发送所述第一信息。
经过上述技术方案，通过终端设备上报驻留或访问小区的第一信息，以辅助网络设备确定或优化寻呼范围。在需要对终端设备发起寻呼时，能够确定出(当前)终端设备可能或高概率停留的小区，因此可优先在终端设备可能或较大概率会停留的一个或多个小区内发起寻呼，一方面优化了寻呼范围，使得寻呼更加精准，避免在过大的范围内寻呼，可减少对不相关的终端设备的影响；另一方面也提高了对该终端设备寻呼的成功概率，尽量避免出现需要在不同范围内多次寻呼终端设备的情况。
第四方面，提供一种通信方法，包括：网络设备接收终端设备发送的第一信息，所述第一信息包括：终端设备驻留/访问过的一个或多个小区标识信息和第二信息，所述第二信息是终端设备在驻留/访问的一个或多个小区上的停留概率信息；所述第一信息用于网络设备确定寻呼范围；网络设备根据所述第一信息确定终端设备的寻呼范围。
根据本申请提供的方案，网络设备基于终端设备上报的第一信息，包括小区标识信息，小区相应的停留概率，以及具体的时间信息等，能够确定寻呼范围。在需要对终端设备发起寻呼时，能够确定出(当前)终端设备可能或高概率停留的小区，因此可优先在终端设备可能或较大概率会停留的一个或多个小区内发起寻呼，一方面优化了寻呼范围，使得寻呼更加精准，避免在过大的范围内寻呼，可减少对不相关的终端设备的影响；另一方面也提高了对该终端设备寻呼的成功概率，尽量避免出现需要在不同范围内多次寻呼终端设备的情况。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，所述第一信息，包括：
驻留/访问过的一个或多个小区标识信息，和/或在驻留/访问过的一个或多个小区的停留概率信息。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，所述第一信息，包括：
在第一时段内，所述终端设备在一个或多个小区上的停留概率信息；或者，
在第一小区上，所述终端设备在多个时段内的停留概率信息。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，所述根据所述第一信息确定寻呼范围，包括：
如果核心网接收所述第一信息，且所述核心网发送所述寻呼，所述核心网根据所述第一信息确定寻呼范围；或者，
如果接入网接收所述第一信息且所述接入网发送所述寻呼，所述接入网根据所述第一信息确定寻呼范围；或者，
如果核心网接收所述第一信息，且接入网发送所述寻呼，所述核心网向所述终端设备的上一个服务基站last serving gNB发送所述终端设备数据和所述第一信息，所述上一个服务基站last serving gNB根据所述第一信息确定寻呼范围。
经过上述技术方案，网络设备基于终端设备上报的第一信息，包括小区标识信息，小区相应的停留概率，以及具体的时间信息等，能够确定寻呼范围。在需要对终端设备发起寻呼时，能够确定出(当前)终端设备可能或高概率停留的小区，因此可优先在终端设备可能或较大概率会停留的一个或多个小区内发起寻呼，一方面优化了寻呼范围，使得寻呼更加精准，避免在过大的范围内寻呼，可减少对不相关的终端设备的影响；另一方面也提高了对该终端设备寻呼的成功概率，尽量避免出现需要在不同范围内多次寻呼终端设备的情况。
第五方面，提供一种用于寻呼的方法，包括：终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一分组参数，所述第一分组参数用于确定无线资源控制空闲态RRC_IDLE终端设备和/或无线资源控制非激活态RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的分组组号；终端设备根据所述第一分组参数确定所述分组组号，所述分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
根据本申请提供的方案，终端设备通过接收网络设备发送的第一分组参数，可以划分idle UE和inactive UE的组号范围，或者给idle UE或inactive UE配置组号偏移量，实现将idle UE和inactive UE分入到不同的UE分组内，即保证idle UE和inactive UE不位于同一组。应理解，网络设备不会对idle UE发起RAN寻呼而只可能发起CN寻呼，但网络设备可能会对inactive UE发起RAN寻呼或CN寻呼，将idle UE和inactive UE分入不同组内，可避免网络对inactive UE发起RAN寻呼时，idle UE不必要地接收RAN寻呼。此外，实际中网络设备对inactive UE发起寻呼的概率可能会高于对idle UE发起寻呼的概率，将idle UE和inactive UE分入不同组内，可避免网络设备对inactive UE较频繁的寻呼影响idle UE频繁地进行不必要的寻呼接收。
结合第五方面，在第五方面的某些实现方式中，所述第一分组参数，包括：
组号范围或组号偏移量；
所述组号范围包括第一组号范围和/或第二组号范围，所述第一组号范围是RRC_IDLE终端设备的组号范围，所述第二组号范围是RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的组号范围；
所述组号偏移量包括第一组号偏移量和/或第二组号偏移量，所述第一组号偏移量是RRC_IDLE终端设备的组号偏移量，所述第二组号偏移量是RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的组号偏移量。
结合第五方面，在第五方面的某些实现方式中，所述接收第一分组参数，包括：
终端设备从广播消息中接收所述第一分组参数；或者，
终端设备从无线资源控制RRC消息中接收所述第一分组参数。
结合第五方面，在第五方面的某些实现方式中，所述根据所述第一分组参数确定所述终端设备的分组组号，包括：
RRC_IDLE终端设备根据所述第一组号范围或所述第一组号偏移量确定所述分组组号；或者，
RRC_INACTIVE终端设备根据所述第二组号范围或第二所述组号偏移量确定所述分组组号。
经过上述技术方案，将不同RRC状态的终端设备RRC_IDLE UE和RRC_INACTIVE UE分组，以减少不相关终端设备的不必要的寻呼接收。通过网络设备向终端设备发送的第一分组参数，可以划分idle UE和inactive UE使用的组号范围，或者给idle UE或inactive  UE配置组号偏移量，实现将idle UE和inactive UE分入到不同的UE分组内，即保证idle UE和inactive UE不位于同一组。应理解，网络设备不会对idle UE发起RAN寻呼而只可能发起CN寻呼，但网络设备可能会对inactive UE发起RAN寻呼或CN寻呼，将idle UE和inactive UE分入不同组内，可避免网络对inactive UE发起RAN寻呼时，idle UE不必要地接收RAN寻呼。此外，实际中网络设备对inactive UE发起寻呼的概率可能会高于对idle UE发起寻呼的概率，将idle UE和inactive UE分入不同组内，可避免网络设备对inactive UE较频繁的寻呼影响idle UE频繁地进行不必要的寻呼接收。
第六方面，提供一种用于寻呼的方法，包括：发送第一分组参数，所述第一分组参数用于确定无线资源控制空闲态RRC_IDLE终端设备和/或无线资源控制非激活态RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的分组组号，所述分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
根据本申请提供的方案，通过划分idle UE和inactive UE使用的组号范围，或者给idle UE或inactive UE配置组号偏移量，可以实现将idle UE和inactive UE分入到不同的UE分组内，即保证idle UE和inactive UE不位于同一组。应理解，网络不会对idle UE发起RAN寻呼而只可能发起CN寻呼，但网络可能会对inactive UE发起RAN寻呼或CN寻呼，将idle UE和inactive UE分入不同组内，可避免网络对inactive UE发起RAN寻呼时，idle UE不必要地接收RAN寻呼。此外，实际中网络对inactive UE发起寻呼的概率可能会高于对idle UE发起寻呼的概率，将idle UE和inactive UE分入不同组内，可避免网络对inactive UE较频繁的寻呼影响idle UE频繁地进行不必要的寻呼接收。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的某些实现方式中，所述第一分组参数包括：
组号范围或组号偏移量；
所述组号范围包括第一组号范围和/或第二组号范围，所述第一组号范围是RRC_IDLE终端设备的组号范围，所述第二组号范围是RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的组号范围；
所述组号偏移量包括第一组号偏移量和/或第二组号偏移量，所述第一组号偏移量是RRC_IDLE终端设备的组号偏移量，所述第二组号偏移量是RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的组号偏移量。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的某些实现方式中，所述发送所述第一分组参数，包括：网络设备向终端设备广播所述第一分组参数；或者，
网络设备通过无线资源控制RRC消息向终端设备发送所述第一分组参数。
经过上述技术方案，将不同RRC状态的终端设备RRC_IDLE UE和RRC_INACTIVE UE分组，以减少不相关终端设备的不必要的寻呼接收。通过网络设备向终端设备发送的第一分组参数，可以划分idle UE和inactive UE使用的组号范围，或者给idle UE或inactive UE配置组号偏移量的方法，可以实现将idle UE和inactive UE分入到不同的UE分组内，即保证idle UE和inactive UE不位于同一组。应理解，网络设备不会对idle UE发起RAN寻呼而只可能发起CN寻呼，但网络设备可能会对inactive UE发起RAN寻呼或CN寻呼，将idle UE和inactive UE分入不同组内，可避免网络对inactive UE发起RAN寻呼时，idle UE不必要地接收RAN寻呼。此外，实际中网络设备对inactive UE发起寻呼的概率可能会高于对idle UE发起寻呼的概率，将idle UE和inactive UE分入不同组内，可避免网络设备对inactive UE较频繁的寻呼影响idle UE频繁地进行不必要的寻呼接收。
第七方面，提供一种用于寻呼的方法，包括：终端设备向核心网设备或接入网设备发 送第二分组参数，所述第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号；终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第四分组参数，所述第四分组参数用于终端设备确定分组组号；终端设备根据所述第二分组参数和所述第四分组参数确定所述终端设备的分组组号；所述分组组号用于网络设备发送分组组号。
根据本申请提供的方案，终端设备和核心网设备根据终端设备的特性协商与终端设备分组相关的信息，可以实现将特性相同或相似的终端设备分入相同组内。其中，可以根据终端设备的业务特性进行终端设备分组，将业务类型或业务需求相同/相似的终端设备分入同一组内。考虑到实际中业务相似的终端设备被同时寻呼的概率更高，这种分组方式可以在某个业务或某个类型的业务到来时尽量保证本次被寻呼的终端设备属于相同的组，从而降低不相关终端设备被寻呼到的概率。此外，还可以根据移动特性进行终端设备分组，将移动性状态或速度相同或相似的终端设备分入同一组内，考虑到实际中移动性高或速度大的终端设备更换驻留小区的概率较大，网络设备需要在大范围内对该终端设备进行寻呼的概率也相应较大，而移动性低或速度小的终端设备停留在某一较小范围的概率较大，网络设备只需要在小范围内对该终端设备进行寻呼的概率也相应较大，这种分组方式可以尽量避免网络对移动性高或速度大的终端设备的寻呼对移动性低或速度小的终端设备产生不必要的寻呼。
结合第七方面，在第七方面的某些实现方式中，所述第二分组参数包括：与终端设备的业务相关的参数，例如，终端设备的业务需求等级。
结合第七方面，在第七方面的某些实现方式中，所述第二分组参数是根据所述终端设备的业务的服务质量参数，和/或终端设备的业务类型，和/或终端设备的移动性状态或速度确定的。
结合第七方面，在第七方面的某些实现方式中，所述接收第四分组参数，包括：
终端设备从接入网设备广播的消息中接收所述第一分组参数；或者，
终端设备接收接入网设备通过无线资源控制RRC消息发送的所述第一分组参数。
结合第七方面，在第七方面的某些实现方式中，所述方法还包括：
如果核心网设备不接收终端设备发送的第二分组参数，发送更新后的第二分组参数；或者，
接收核心网设备发送的更新后的第二分组参数，所述第二分组参数用于终端设备确定分组组号。
结合第七方面，在第七方面的某些实现方式中，所述方法还包括：
接收核心网设备发送的第二分组参数，所述第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
经过上述技术方案，通过区分不同终端设备的特性实现终端设备的分组，以降低终端设备进行不必要的寻呼接收的概率，可以根据终端设备的业务特性进行终端设备分组，将业务类型或业务需求相同/相似的终端设备分入同一组内，考虑到实际中业务相似的终端设备被同时寻呼的概率更高，这种分组方式可以在某个业务或某个类型的业务到来时尽量保证本次被寻呼的终端设备属于相同的组，从而降低不相关终端设备被寻呼到的概率。此外，还可以根据移动特性进行终端设备分组，将移动性状态或速度相同或相似的终端设备分入同一组内，考虑到实际中移动性高或速度大的终端设备更换驻留小区的概率较大，网 络设备需要在大范围内对该终端设备进行寻呼的概率也相应较大，而移动性低或速度小的终端设备停留在某一较小范围的概率较大，网络设备只需要在小范围内对该终端设备进行寻呼的概率也相应较大，这种分组方式可以尽量避免网络对移动性高或速度大的终端设备的寻呼对移动性低或速度小的终端设备产生不必要的寻呼。
第八方面，提供一种用于寻呼的方法，包括：核心网设备接收终端设备发送的第二分组参数，所述第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号；核心网设备向接入网设备发送所述第二分组参数和第三分组参数，所述第三分组参数用于确定第四分组参数，所述第四分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号，所述分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
根据本申请提供的方案，终端设备和核心网设备根据终端设备的特性协商与终端设备分组相关的信息，可以实现将特性相同或相似的终端设备分入相同组内。其中，可以根据终端设备的业务特性进行终端设备分组，将业务类型或业务需求相同/相似的终端设备分入同一组内，考虑到实际中业务相似的终端设备被同时寻呼的概率更高，这种分组方式可以在某个业务或某个类型的业务到来时尽量保证本次被寻呼的终端设备属于相同的组，从而降低不相关终端设备被寻呼到的概率。此外，还可以根据移动特性进行终端设备分组，将移动性状态或速度相同或相似的终端设备分入同一组内，考虑到实际中移动性高或速度大的终端设备更换驻留小区的概率较大，网络设备需要在大范围内对该终端设备进行寻呼的概率也相应较大，而移动性低或速度小的终端设备停留在某一较小范围的概率较大，网络设备只需要在小范围内对该终端设备进行寻呼的概率也相应较大，这种分组方式可以尽量避免网络对移动性高或速度大的终端设备的寻呼对移动性低或速度小的终端设备产生不必要的寻呼。
结合第八方面，在第八方面的某些实现方式中，所述第二分组参数包括：与终端设备的业务相关的参数。
结合第八方面，在第八方面的某些实现方式中，所述第二分组参数是根据所述终端设备的业务的服务质量参数，和/或终端设备的业务类型，和/或终端设备的移动性状态或速度确定的。
结合第八方面，在第八方面的某些实现方式中，所述方法还包括：
不接收终端设备发送的第二分组参数；或者，
发送更新后的第二分组参数，所述更新后的第二分组参数是根据终端设备发送的第二分组参数确定的，所述第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
结合第八方面，在第八方面的某些实现方式中，所述方法还包括：
确定第二分组参数，所述第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号；
向终端设备发送第二分组参数。
经过上述技术方案，通过区分不同终端设备的特性实现终端设备的分组，以降低终端设备进行不必要的寻呼接收的概率，可以根据终端设备的业务特性进行终端设备分组，将业务类型或业务需求相同/相似的终端设备分入同一组内，考虑到实际中业务相似的终端设备被同时寻呼的概率更高，这种分组方式可以在某个业务或某个类型的业务到来时尽量保证本次被寻呼的终端设备属于相同的组，从而降低不相关终端设备被寻呼到的概率。此外，还可以根据移动特性进行终端设备分组，将移动性状态或速度相同或相似的终端设备分入同一组内，考虑到实际中移动性高或速度大的终端设备更换驻留小区的概率较大，网 络设备需要在大范围内对该终端设备进行寻呼的概率也相应较大，而移动性低或速度小的终端设备停留在某一较小范围的概率较大，网络设备只需要在小范围内对该终端设备进行寻呼的概率也相应较大，这种分组方式可以尽量避免网络对移动性高或速度大的终端设备的寻呼对移动性低或速度小的终端设备产生不必要的寻呼。
第九方面，提供一种用于寻呼的方法，包括：接入网设备接收核心网设备或终端设备发送的第二分组参数，所述第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号；接入网设备接收核心网设备发送的第三分组参数，所述第三分组参数用于确定第四分组参数；接入网设备根据所述第三分组参数确定所述第四分组参数；接入网设备向终端设备发送所述第四分组参数，所述第四分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号；接入网设备根据所述第二分组参数和所述第四分组参数确定终端设备的分组组号，所述分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
根据本申请提供的方案，终端设备和核心网设备根据终端设备的特性协商与终端设备分组相关的信息，可以实现将特性相同或相似的终端设备分入相同组内。其中，可以根据终端设备的业务特性进行终端设备分组，将业务类型或业务需求相同/相似的终端设备分入同一组内，考虑到实际中业务相似的终端设备被同时寻呼的概率更高，这种分组方式可以在某个业务或某个类型的业务到来时尽量保证本次被寻呼的终端设备属于相同的组，从而降低不相关终端设备被寻呼到的概率。此外，还可以根据移动特性进行终端设备分组，将移动性状态或速度相同或相似的终端设备分入同一组内，考虑到实际中移动性高或速度大的终端设备更换驻留小区的概率较大，网络设备需要在大范围内对该终端设备进行寻呼的概率也相应较大，而移动性低或速度小的终端设备停留在某一较小范围的概率较大，网络设备只需要在小范围内对该终端设备进行寻呼的概率也相应较大，这种分组方式可以尽量避免网络对移动性高或速度大的终端设备的寻呼对移动性低或速度小的终端设备产生不必要的寻呼。
结合第九方面，在第九方面的某些实现方式中，所述第二分组参数包括：与终端设备的业务相关的参数。
结合第九方面，在第九方面的某些实现方式中，所述第二分组参数是根据所述终端设备的业务的服务质量参数，和/或终端设备的业务类型，和/或终端设备的移动性状态或速度确定的。
结合第九方面，在第九方面的某些实现方式中，所述向终端设备发送所述第四分组参数，包括：
接入网设备向终端设备广播所述第四分组参数；或者，
接入网设备通过无线资源控制RRC消息向终端设备发送所述第四分组参数。
经过上述技术方案，通过区分不同终端设备的特性实现终端设备的分组，以降低终端设备进行不必要的寻呼接收的概率，可以根据终端设备的业务特性进行终端设备分组，将业务类型或业务需求相同/相似的终端设备分入同一组内，考虑到实际中业务相似的终端设备被同时寻呼的概率更高，这种分组方式可以在某个业务或某个类型的业务到来时尽量保证本次被寻呼的终端设备属于相同的组，从而降低不相关终端设备被寻呼到的概率。此外，还可以根据移动特性进行终端设备分组，将移动性状态或速度相同或相似的终端设备分入同一组内，考虑到实际中移动性高或速度大的终端设备更换驻留小区的概率较大，网络设备需要在大范围内对该终端设备进行寻呼的概率也相应较大，而移动性低或速度小的 终端设备停留在某一较小范围的概率较大，网络设备只需要在小范围内对该终端设备进行寻呼的概率也相应较大，这种分组方式可以尽量避免网络对移动性高或速度大的终端设备的寻呼对移动性低或速度小的终端设备产生不必要的寻呼。
第十方面，提供了一种通信装置，包括用于执行上述第一方面至第九方面中任一方面及其各实现方式中的通信方法的各步骤的单元。
在一种设计中，该通信装置为通信芯片，通信芯片可以包括用于发送信息或数据的输入电路或者接口，以及用于接收信息或数据的输出电路或者接口。
在另一种设计中，所述通信装置为通信设备(例如，终端设备、P-CSCF设备或网关设备等)，通信芯片可以包括用于发送信息或数据的发射机，以及用于接收信息或数据的接收机。
第十一方面，提供了一种通信设备，包括，处理器，存储器，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得该通信设备执行第一方面至第九方面中任一种及其各种可能实现方式中的通信方法。
可选地，所述处理器为一个或多个，所述存储器为一个或多个。
可选地，所述存储器可以与所述处理器集成在一起，或者所述存储器与处理器分离设置。
可选的，该转发设备还包括，发射机(发射器)和接收机(接收器)。
第十二方面，提供了一种通信系统，上述终端设备和网络设备。
第十三方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)，当所述计算机程序被运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第九方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第十四方面，提供了一种计算机可读介质，所述计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第九方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第十五方面，提供了一种芯片系统，包括存储器和处理器，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得安装有该芯片系统的通信设备执行上述第一方面至第九方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
其中，该芯片系统可以包括用于发送信息或数据的输入电路或者接口，以及用于接收信息或数据的输出电路或者接口。
根据本申请实施例的方案，通过一种降低寻呼虚警方案，针对寻呼虚警可能产生的原因，通过区分寻呼是否为新寻呼或重复寻呼，终端设备上报驻留或访问小区的停留概率信息，在寻呼中区分不同RRC状态的终端设备，以及根据不同终端设备的特性实现终端设备的分组以降低终端设备进行不必要的寻呼接收的概率的方案这四种方式，优化寻呼对象的确定和选择，减少寻呼对不相关终端设备的影响，从而降低寻呼虚警，以尽量避免产生不必要的UE功耗。
附图说明
图1是本申请实施例适用的一种系统的示意图。
图2是本申请实施例适用的寻呼场景的示意图。
图3是本申请实施例适用的寻呼过程的示意图。
图4是本申请的一例用于寻呼的方法的示意图。
图5是本申请的另一例用于寻呼的方法的示意图。
图6是本申请的另一例用于寻呼的方法的示意图。
图7是本申请的另一例用于寻呼的方法的示意图。
图8是本申请的另一例用于寻呼的方法的示意图。
图9是本申请的另一例用于寻呼的方法的示意图。
图10是适用于本申请的寻呼装置的一例示意性框图。
图11是适用于本申请的寻呼装置的另一例示意性框图。
图12是适用于本申请的终端设备的一例示意性框图。
图13是适用于本申请的网络设备的另一例示意性框图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合附图，对本申请中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述，显然，所描述的实施例是本申请一部分实施例，而不是全部的实施例。基于本申请中的实施例，本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例，都属于本申请保护的范围。
应理解，本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种寻呼系统，例如：全球移动通讯(Global System of Mobile communication,GSM)系统、码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access,CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(General Packet Radio Service,GPRS)、长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(Frequency Division Duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(Time Division Duplex,TDD)、通用移动寻呼系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunication System,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access,WiMAX)寻呼系统、未来的第五代(5th Generation,5G)系统或新无线(New Radio,NR)等。
通常来说，传统的寻呼系统支持的连接数有限，也易于实现，然而，随着寻呼技术的发展，移动寻呼系统将不仅支持传统的寻呼，还将支持例如，设备到设备(Device to Device,D2D)寻呼，机器到机器(Machine to Machine,M2M)寻呼，机器类型寻呼(Machine Type Communication,MTC)，车联网(Vehicle To Everything,V2X)寻呼，例如，车到车(Vehicle to Vehicle,V2V)寻呼、车到基础设施(Vehicle to Infrastructure,V2I)寻呼，车到行人(Vehicle to Pedestrian,V2P)寻呼，车道网络(Vehicle to Network,V2N)寻呼等。
图1是本申请实施例适用的一种系统的示意图。如图1所示，系统100可以包括网络设备110以及终端设备120和130，其中，网络设备与终端设备之间通过无线连接。应理解，图1仅以系统包括一个网络设备为例进行说明，但本申请实施例并不限于此，例如，系统还可以包括更多的网络设备；类似地，系统也可以包括更多的终端设备。还应理解，系统也可以称为网络，本申请实施例对此并不限定。
本申请实施例中的网络设备110可以是用于与终端设备寻呼的设备，该网络设备可以是全球移动通讯(GSM Global System of Mobile communication,GSM)或码分多址(Code  Division Multiple Access,CDMA)中的基站(Base Transceiver Station,BTS)，也可以是宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,WCDMA)系统中的基站(NodeB,NB)，还可以是长期演进系统中的演进型基站(Evolutional Node B,eNB或eNodeB)，还可以是云无线接入网络(Cloud Radio Access Network,CRAN)场景下的无线控制器，或者该网络设备可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备以及未来5G网络中的网络设备或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(Public Land Mobile Network,PLMN)网络中的网络设备等。
另外，在本申请实施例中，网络设备110为小区提供服务，终端设备通过该小区使用的传输资源(例如，频域资源，或者说，频谱资源)与网络设备进行寻呼，该小区可以是网络设备(例如基站)对应的小区，小区可以属于宏基站，也可以属于小小区(small cell)对应的基站，这里的小小区可以包括：城市小区(Metro cell)、微小区(Micro cell)、微微小区(Pico cell)、毫微微小区(Femto cell)等，这些小小区具有覆盖范围小、发射功率低的特点，适用于提供高速率的数据传输服务。另外，该小区还可以是超小区(Hypercell)。
本申请实施例中的终端设备120可以称为用户设备(User Equipment,UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线寻呼设备、用户代理或用户装置。终端设备可以经无线接入网(Radio Access Network,RAN)与一个或多个核心网进行寻呼，例如，用户设备可以是移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话)或具有移动终端的计算机等，例如，用户设备还可以是便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的或者车载的移动装置，它们与无线接入网交换语音和/或数据。
终端设备120可以是WLAN中的站点(STAION,ST)，可以是智能电话、便携式电脑、全球定位系统、无绳电话、会话启动协议(Session Initiation Protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)设备、具有无线寻呼功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、车联网终端、电脑、膝上型计算机、手持式寻呼设备、手持式计算设备、卫星无线设备、无线调制解调器卡、电视机顶盒(set top box,STB)、用户驻地设备(customer premise equipment,CPE)和/或用于在无线系统上进行寻呼的其它设备以及下一代寻呼系统。例如，5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络PLMN网络中的终端设备等。
作为示例而非限定，在本申请实施例中，该终端设备130还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备，是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称，如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上，或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备，更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能，例如：智能手表或智能眼镜等，以及只专注于某一类应用功能，需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用，如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。
此外，在本申请实施例中，终端设备130还可以是物联网(Internet of Things,IoT)系统中的终端设备，IoT是未来信息技术发展的重要组成部分，其主要技术特点是将物品通 过寻呼技术与网络连接，从而实现人机互连，物物互连的智能化网络。
图2是本申请实施例适用的寻呼场景的示意图。如图2所示，终端设备230和终端设备240处于接入网设备210提供的小区，终端设备250处于接入网设备220提供的小区。终端设备230、终端设备240和终端设备250属于同一终端设备组。
应理解，核心网200的功能主要是提供用户连接、对用户的管理以及对业务完成承载，作为承载网络提供到外部网络的接口。用户连接的建立包括移动性管理(mobile management,MM)、呼叫管理(connection management,CM)、交换/路由、录音通知等功能。用户管理包括用户的描述、服务质量(Quality of Service,QoS)、用户寻呼记录(accounting)、虚拟归属环境(virtual home environment,VHE)和安全性(由鉴权中心提供相应的安全性措施包含了对移动业务的安全性管理和对外部网络访问的安全性处理)。承载连接(access)包括到外部的公共交换电话网络(Public Switched Telephone Network,PSTN)、外部电路数据网和分组数据网、互联网络(internet)和内联网(intranets)、以及移动网络自身的手机短信服务(Short Message Service,SMS)服务器等等。
在本申请实施例中，核心网200可以提供的基本业务包括移动办公、电子商务、寻呼、娱乐性业务、旅行和基于位置的服务、遥感业务(telemetry)、简单消息传递业务(监视控制)等等。
作为示例而非限定，核心网200设备可以包括：接入和移动性管理功能(access & mobility function,AMF)、会话管理功能(session management function,SMF)、策略控制功能(policy control function,PCF)、用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)等功能单元，这些功能单元可以独立工作，也可以组合在一起实现某些控制功能，如：AMF、SMF和PCF可以组合在一起作为管理设备，用于完成终端设备的接入鉴权、安全加密、位置注册等接入控制和移动性管理功能，以及用户面传输路径的建立、释放和更改等会话管理功能，以及分析一些切片(slice)相关的数据(如拥塞)、终端设备相关的数据的功能，UPF主要完成用户面数据的路由转发等功能，如：负责对终端设备的数据报文过滤、数据传输/转发、速率控制、生成计费信息等。
接入网设备210可以包括接入网/无线接入网(Radio Access Network,RAN)设备，由多个5G-RAN节点组成的网络，该5G-RAN节点可以为：接入节点(access point,AP)、下一代新基站(NR nodeB，gNB)、下一代演进型基站(ng-eNB，gNB)、收发点(transmission receive point,TRP)、传输点(transmission point,TP)或某种其它接入节点。5G-RAN节点内部又可以分为集中单元(central unit,CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)。
此外，接入网设备220还可以是SM或CDMA中的基站(Base Transceiver Station,BTS)，也可以是WCDMA中的基站(NodeB,NB)，还可以是LTE中的演进型基站(Evolutional Node B，eNB或eNodeB)，或者中继站或接入点，或者车载设备、可穿戴设备以及未来5G网络中的接入网设备或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的接入网设备等，本申请并未特别限定。
需要说明的是，在本申请实施例中，接入网设备220可以为小区提供服务，终端设备通过该小区使用的传输资源(例如，频域资源，或者说，频谱资源)与接入网设备进行寻呼，该小区可以是接入网设备(例如基站)对应的小区，小区可以属于宏基站，也可以属于小小区(Small cell)对应的基站，这里的小小区可以包括：城市小区(metro cell)、微 小区(micro cell)、微微小区(pico cell)、毫微微小区(femto cell)等，这些小小区具有覆盖范围小、发射功率低的特点，适用于提供高速率的数据传输服务。
每个接入网设备可包括一个或多个天线。每个接入网设备可以与多个终端设备寻呼。其中，接入网设备可以通过前向链路(也称为下行链路)向终端设备发送数据或信息，并通过反向链路(也称为上行链路)从终端设备接收数据或信息。被设计用于寻呼的每个天线(或者由多个天线组成的天线组)和/或区域称为接入网设备的扇区。例如，可将天线组设计为与接入网设备覆盖区域的扇区中的终端设备寻呼。接入网设备可以通过单个天线或多天线发射分集向其对应的扇区内所有的终端设备发送信号。在接入网设备通过前向链路与终端设备进行寻呼的过程中，接入网设备的发射天线也可利用波束成形来改善前向链路的信噪比。
在本申请实施例中，有关终端设备230、240和250已在上述图1中详细说明，此处不再赘述。
需要说明的是，上述“设备”也可以称为实体、网元、装置或模块等，本申请并未特别限定。并且，在本申请中，为了便于理解和说明，在对部分描述中省略“网元”这一描述，例如，将RAN网元简称RAN，此情况下，该“RAN网元”应理解为RAN网元或RAN实体，以下，省略对相同或相似情况的说明。
此外，本申请实施例的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。本申请中使用的术语“制品”涵盖可从任何计算机可读器件、载体或介质访问的计算机程序。例如，计算机可读介质可以包括，但不限于：磁存储器件(例如，硬盘、软盘或磁带等)，光盘(例如，压缩盘(Compact Disc,CD)、数字通用盘(Digital Versatile Disc,DVD)等)，智能卡和闪存器件(例如，可擦写可编程只读存储器(Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory,EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。另外，本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读介质。术语“机器可读介质”可包括但不限于，无线信道和能够存储、包含和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。
需要说明的是，在本申请实施例中，在应用层可以运行多个应用程序，此情况下，执行本申请实施例的方法的应用程序与用于控制接收端设备完成所接收到的数据所对应的动作的应用程序可以是不同的应用程序。
图3是本申请实施例适用的寻呼过程的示意图。如图3所示，处于无线资源控制空闲态RRC_IDLE或无线资源控制非激活态RRC_INACTIVE的终端设备在每个寻呼周期(paging cycle)内监听一个自己的寻呼时机PO，以确定网络是否进行了寻呼。
为了使本申请中实施例的表述更加清楚明白，下面对寻呼的基本流程作简单说明：
首先，网络设备选择一定的寻呼范围，在PO内发送寻呼下行控制信息DCI。
需要说明的是，寻呼范围是网络设备发送寻呼的区域，该区域可以包括一个或多个基站下的一个或多个小区，该区域由网络设备决定，例如，针对无线资源控制空闲态RRC_IDLE UE，网络设备可将该UE所属的跟踪区(Tracking Area,TA)作为寻呼范围；针对无线资源控制非激活态RRC_INACTIVE UE，网络设备可将该UE所属的基于无线接入网(RAN Notification Area,RAN)的通知区域(RAN-based Notification Area,RNA)作为寻呼范围。
其中，寻呼DCI中可能包括寻呼消息(paging message)的调度信息(包括调度寻呼消息的资源的时频域信息和其他调度信息)和/或短消息(short message)等，具体包含内容如下表所示：
表一
Figure PCTCN2020123444-appb-000001
然后，用户设备UE接收到网络设备发送的寻呼DCI之后，根据寻呼DCI的内容确定后续操作，具体内容为：
如果寻呼DCI中包含寻呼消息的调度信息，则UE根据调度信息在物理下行共享信道(Physical Downlink Shared Channel,PDSCH)上接收并解码寻呼消息，然后根据寻呼消息的内容确定后续操作。其中，寻呼消息包含网络所寻呼的一个或多个UE的UE标识信息和/或被寻呼UE的接入类型信息。UE解码寻呼消息后确定该寻呼消息中是否包含自己的UE标识：如果该寻呼消息中不包含自己的UE标识，则UE忽略该寻呼消息；如果该寻呼消息中包含自己的UE标识，则UE根据寻呼消息中的其他内容确定后续操作。
如果寻呼DCI中包含短消息，则UE根据短消息的指示接收更新的系统信息和/或地震海啸预警或商业移动告警。
如果寻呼DCI中包含寻呼消息的调度信息以及短消息，则UE按照规定的流程分别接收寻呼消息，以及更新的系统信息和/或地震海啸预警或商业移动告警。
需要说明的是，根据触发寻呼的网元不同，寻呼可以分为：核心网(Core Network,CN)触发的CN寻呼和无线接入网(Radio Access Network,RAN)触发的RAN寻呼。网络设备可能对RRC_IDLE UE发起CN寻呼，可能对RRC_INACTIVE UE发起CN寻呼或RAN寻呼。
应理解，网络设备发起的一次寻呼中可以针对一个或多个UE，即一条寻呼消息中可以携带一个或多个UE的UE标识。
为了达到UE节能的目的，在寻呼机制中可以引入节能信号，唤醒信号WUS就属于节能信号的一种。具体地，在寻呼过程中，网络设备可以在寻呼时机PO前或者PO上发送WUS，用于指示UE接下来是否需要监听PO或接收寻呼消息，以达到避免UE不必要地寻呼接收的效果。其中，WUS的类型可以包括但不限于包括下行控制信息DCI，物理层信号/序列，媒体访问控制单元MAC CE，无线资源控制RRC信令等。
尽管引入了节能信号，但是仍然存在由于各种原因而导致PO内所有UE接收并解码寻呼消息的情况，最终发现该寻呼消息中并没有自己的UE标识，即网络设备实际并没有寻呼该UE，因此造成UE不必要的寻呼监听接收，产生寻呼虚警问题，造成不必要的UE功耗。
目前，在寻呼机制中，造成寻呼虚警的原因可能有以下几个：
(1)多个UE监听同一PO
不同UE计算出的PO位置可能相同，当多个UE监听同一PO时，在寻呼机制中，UE在接收到寻呼DCI时只获得寻呼消息的调度信息，而不能区分出该寻呼消息是否为针对自己的寻呼消息，UE只能在随后接收并解码完PDSCH上的寻呼消息后，根据寻呼消息中的UE标识信息才能判断出第一寻呼是否针对自己。因此，对于实际未被寻呼的UE来说，就存在不必要的寻呼消息接收以及解码，产生不必要的UE功耗。
(2)重复寻呼
网络寻呼UE时，如果被寻呼的UE没有成功接收寻呼，网络设备后续还会在相关的PO上继续进行寻呼，导致其他不相关的UE再次进行不必要的寻呼消息接收以及解码。
(3)寻呼范围不优化
网络寻呼UE时，会在一定的寻呼范围内发送寻呼，寻呼范围内所有与被寻呼UE的PO位置相同的UE都会接收到寻呼，但除被寻呼UE之外，其他UE都是进行了不必要的寻呼消息接收解码。此外，如果网络某次寻呼在一定范围内没有成功寻呼到目标UE，网络设备可能会更换或扩大寻呼范围继续寻呼，导致该寻呼涉及更大范围内的更多UE。因此，如果网络确定的寻呼范围不优化，就会导致较多不相关的UE产生寻呼虚警问题。
针对上述问题，本申请设计了一种降低寻呼虚警的方案，针对寻呼虚警问题可能产生的原因，通过区分寻呼是否为新寻呼或重复寻呼，UE上报驻留或访问小区的信息，以及在寻呼中区分不同RRC状态的UE者三种方式，实现优化寻呼对象的确定和选择，减少寻呼对不相关UE的影响，从而降低寻呼虚警，以尽量避免产生不必要的UE功耗。
下面将具体描述根据本申请实施例的降低寻呼虚警的方法。
图4示出了本申请的一例用于寻呼的方法的示意图。该方法包括：
S410，网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息，终端设备从网络设备接收该第一指示信息，该第一寻呼的类型包括：非重复寻呼或重复寻呼(paging repetition)，该第一指示信息用于确定第一寻呼的类型。
在本申请实施例中，网络设备向终端设备发送指示信息前，会选择一定的寻呼范围。
应理解，寻呼范围是网络设备发送寻呼的区域，该区域由网络设备决定。例如，针对RRC空闲态UE，网络设备可将该UE所属的跟踪区(Tracking Area,TA)作为寻呼范围；针对RRC非激活态UE，网络设备可将该UE所属的RAN(Radio Access Network)通知区域(RAN Notification Area,RAN)作为寻呼范围。
还应理解，第一指示信息可以承载但不限于下行控制信息(Downlink Control Information,DCI)，物理层信号/序列(sequence)，媒体接入控制单元(MAC Control Element,MAC CE)，无限资源控制(Radio Resource Control,RRC)消息等。其中，具体承载的信令或消息可以包括但不限于，唤醒信号(Wake Up Signal,WUS)，寻呼DCI，寻呼消息等等。
可选地，在本申请实施例中，重复寻呼满足：如果第一寻呼的寻呼消息(paging message)内容与第二寻呼的寻呼消息内容相同，该第一寻呼为重复寻呼，该第二寻呼是在该第一寻呼之前发送的寻呼；或者，如果第一寻呼的终端设备属于第二寻呼的终端设备，该第一寻呼为重复寻呼，该第二寻呼是在该第一寻呼之前发送的寻呼。
具体地，如果第一寻呼的寻呼消息内容与第二寻呼的寻呼消息内容相同，该第一寻呼为重复寻呼，可以理解为：本次寻呼与之前寻呼的终端设备的标识信息和/或接入类型信息，以及具体的寻呼消息均相同。
应理解，寻呼消息的内容可以包括但不限于，终端设备的标识信息，接入类型信息，系统信息更新指示、地震海啸预警/商业移动告警等内容。
需要说明的是，除了上述提到的寻呼消息内容，本申请的技术方案并不排除未来寻呼消息可能会新引入的其他内容。
具体地，如果第一寻呼的终端设备属于第二寻呼的终端设备，该第一寻呼为重复寻呼，可以理解为：本次被寻呼的终端设备属于在本次寻呼之前已经被寻呼的终端设备的部分或全部。这里对寻呼消息内容不做限制，只考虑被寻呼的用户设备。例如，第一次被寻呼的UE为UE 1，UE 2和UE 3，第二次被寻呼的UE为UE 1和UE 2，则第二次寻呼为一次重复发送的寻呼，因为UE 1和UE 2此前已经被寻呼过；再例如，第一次被寻呼的UE为UE 1和UE 2，第二次被寻呼的UE为UE 1，UE 2和UE 3，则第二次寻呼不是重复发送的寻呼，主要是针对UE3来说；又例如，第一次被寻呼的UE为UE 1，UE 2和UE 3，第二次被寻呼的UE为UE 1和UE 4，则第二次寻呼也不是重复发送的寻呼，主要是针对UE4来说。
网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息的方式可以是显式的方式，例如，通过比特域/字段来指示第一寻呼的类型；也可以是隐式的方式，例如，通过相同的字符、数值来指示第一寻呼的类型。
下面通过网络设备发送第一指示信息的3种方式进行分别说明。
方式1：
可选地，在本申请一个实施例中，网络设备在发送寻呼时发送第一指示信息，即网络 设备在每次寻呼时都发送该第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于终端设备确定第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼，还是重复寻呼。
该实施例为显式指示的方式。其中，通过比特域/字段来指示第一寻呼的类型，不同比特域的取值与第一寻呼的类型之间的对应关系可以由网络设备进行配置，如表二所示。例如，网络设备向终端设备发送一个1bit的第一指示信息，其中第一指示信息为“0”，表示第一寻呼的类型为新发送的寻呼，即非重复寻呼；第一指示信息为“1”，表示第一寻呼的类型为重复发送的寻呼。再例如，网络设备可以向终端设备发送一个2bits的第一指示信息，第一指示信息为“00”，表示第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼，第一指示信息为“01”，表示第一寻呼的类型为重复发送的寻呼，第一指示信息为“10”，表示第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼等；又例如，网络设备可以向终端设备发送一个3bits的第一指示信息，第一指示信息为“000”，表示第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼，第一指示信息为“001”，表示第一寻呼的类型为重复发送的寻呼，第一指示信息为“010”，表示第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼等。
需要说明的是，第一指示信息可以是网络设备在寻呼之前发送的，也可以是网络设备在发送寻呼的时候，同时发送第一指示信息。
表二
Figure PCTCN2020123444-appb-000002
表二只是用于举例说明，本申请实施例对第一指示信息占用的比特数不作限定。
方式2：
可选地，在本申请一个实施例中，网络设备还可以在发送新寻呼时发送第一指示信息，指示本次寻呼为非重复寻呼；或者，网络设备在重复发送寻呼时发送第一指示信息，指示本次寻呼为重复寻呼。
也就是说，网络设备可以只在发送新寻呼时发送第一指示信息，用来确定该第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼；如果第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，网络设备可以不发送第一指示信息；或者，网络设备只在发送重复寻呼时发送第一指示信息，用来确定该第一寻呼为重复寻呼；如果第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼，网络设备可以不发送第一指示信息。
需要说明的是，新寻呼是非重复寻呼，新寻呼满足：如果第一寻呼的寻呼消息(paging message)内容与第二寻呼的寻呼消息内容不相同，该第一寻呼为新寻呼，该第二寻呼是在该第一寻呼之前发送的寻呼；或者，如果第一寻呼的一个或多个终端设备不属于第二寻呼的终端设备，该第一寻呼为新寻呼，该第二寻呼是在该第一寻呼之前发送的寻呼。例如，第一次被寻呼的UE为UE 1和UE 2，第二次被寻呼的UE为UE 1，UE 2和UE 3，那么第二次寻呼就是新发送的寻呼，因为UE3未被寻呼过。
需要说明的是，第一指示信息可以承载但不限于下行控制信息(Downlink Control Information,DCI)，物理层信号/序列(sequence)，介质访问控制元(MAC Control Element, MAC CE)，无限资源控制(Radio Resource Control,RRC)消息等。其中，具体承载的信令或消息可以包括但不限于，唤醒信号(Wake Up Signal,WUS)，寻呼DCI，寻呼消息等等。
还需要说明是，第一指示信息承载于不同的信令中，终端设备所做出的处理也是不同的。具体地，网络设备在寻呼之前发送第一指示信息，假设该第一指示信息承载在唤醒信号WUS中，那么终端设备确定的是后续是否需要监听PO(即接收寻呼DCI)以及接收寻呼消息；或者网络设备在寻呼时发送第一指示信息，假设该第一指示信息承载在寻呼DCI中，那么终端设备确定的是后续是否需要接收寻呼消息。
该实施例为显式指示的方式。其中，通过比特域/字段来指示第一寻呼的类型，不同比特域的取值与第一寻呼的类型之间的对应关系可以由网络设备进行配置。例如，网络设备可以在确定发送的寻呼类型为新寻呼时，发送一个1bit的第一指示信息“0”，用于表示该第一寻呼为新发送的寻呼，而对于确定发送的寻呼类型为重复寻呼时，则不发送该第一指示信息，此时，终端设备可以根据接收的承载指示信息的信令或消息中(例如，寻呼DCI)没有携带该第一指示信息来判断本次寻呼为重复寻呼，从而不接收、解码相应的寻呼消息；再例如，网络设备可以在确定发送的寻呼类型为重复寻呼时，发送一个2bits的第一指示信息“00”，用于表示该第一寻呼为重复发送的寻呼，而对于确定发送的寻呼类型为新寻呼时，则不发送该第一指示信息。此时，终端设备可以根据接收的寻呼DCI中没有携带该第一指示信息进行判断本次寻呼为非重复寻呼，从而接收、解码相应的寻呼消息，并进行后续的操作；又例如，网络设备可以在确定发送的寻呼类型为重复寻呼时，发送一个3bits的第一指示信息“000”，用于表示该第一寻呼为新发送的寻呼，而对于确定发送的寻呼类型为重复寻呼时，则不发送该第一指示信息。此时，终端设备可以根据接收的寻呼DCI中没有携带该第一指示信息进行判断本次寻呼为非重复寻呼，从而接收、解码相应的寻呼消息，并进行后续的操作等等。
方式3：
可选地，在本申请一个实施例中，网络设备还可以针对一组相同的寻呼，都发送相同的第一指示信息，用于确定第一寻呼的类型是非重复寻呼，还是重复寻呼。
该实施例为隐式指示的方式。其中，通过相同的字符、数值来指示第一寻呼的类型。字符、数值的取值与第一寻呼的类型之间的对应关系可以由网络设备进行配置。例如，假设有一组相同的寻呼总共发送了3次(即第一次为新发送的寻呼，第二、三次为重复发送的寻呼)，网络设备在这3次寻呼时都发送一个相同的字符或数值(例如，“A”或“1”)，用于体现这3次寻呼为一组相同的寻呼。假设之后有另一组相同的寻呼总共发送了2次(即第一次为新发送的寻呼，第二次为重复发送的寻呼)，网络设备在这2次寻呼时都发送另一个相同的字符或数值(例如，“B”或“2”)，用于体现这2次寻呼为另一组相同的寻呼。因此，网络设备通过在一组相同的寻呼中都发送相同的第一指示信息的方式，能够使终端设备间接确定第一寻呼的类型是非重复寻呼，还是重复寻呼。
S420，终端设备根据第一指示信息确定第一寻呼的类型。
下面分别说明终端设备在接收第一指示信息后，如何确定第一寻呼的类型。
针对方式1和方式2：
由于网络设备发送第一指示信息的方式为显示指示，该第一指示信息直接表示第一寻 呼的类型是非重复寻呼，还是重复寻呼，终端设备也就可以直接根据该第一指示信息确定该第一寻呼的类型是非重复寻呼，还是重复寻呼。
需要说明的是，在方式1中，网络设备是在每次发送寻呼时都发送第一指示信息，在方式2中，网络设备是选择性地发送第一指示信息，终端设备还可以根据有无第一指示信息从而确定该第一寻呼的寻呼类型。
针对方式3：
终端设备在接收第一指示信息时，根据判断第一寻呼的第一指示信息与上一次接收的指示信息是否相同，从而确定该第一寻呼的寻呼类型。即如果第一寻呼的第一指示信息与上一次接收的第一指示信息不同，确定该第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼，接收该第一寻呼；或者，如果第一寻呼的第一指示信息与上一次接收的第一指示信息相同，确定该第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，不接收该第一寻呼。
S430，根据第一寻呼类型确定接收或不接收该第一寻呼。
下面分别说明终端设备在确定第一寻呼的类型后，如何确定是否接收第一寻呼。
针对方式1和方式2：
可选地，在本申请一个实施例中，终端设备可以根据第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼或重复寻呼，再结合之前接收过的寻呼情况判断是否接收该第一寻呼。如果第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼，接收该第一寻呼；或者，如果第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，不接收该第一寻呼。
具体地，如果第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，且终端设备在该第一寻呼之前未接收过寻呼，就接收该第一寻呼；或者，如果第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，且终端设备在该第一寻呼之前已经接收过寻呼，就不接收该第一寻呼。
应理解，终端设备未接收过寻呼包括但不限于：终端设备在第一寻呼之前一定的时间内(例如，N个寻呼周期内)和/或在当前驻留的服务小区上未接收过寻呼，或者终端设备在第一寻呼之前未接收过与该第一寻呼相同的寻呼。
还应理解，终端设备已接收过寻呼包括但不限于：终端设备在第一寻呼之前一定的时间内(例如，N个寻呼周期内)和/或在当前驻留的服务小区上已接收过寻呼，或者终端设备在第一寻呼之前已接收过与该第一寻呼相同的寻呼。
可选地，在本申请一个实施例中，终端设备还可以结合唤醒信号WUS判断是否接收寻呼。例如，在寻呼时机PO前或PO上接收网络设备发送的WUS，如果WUS指示终端设备需要接收寻呼，则终端设备使用上述方式根据第一指示信息和自己接收过的寻呼的情况判断是否接收该第一寻呼；如果WUS指示终端设备不需要接收寻呼，则终端设备可不接收该第一寻呼。
具体地，当WUS指示终端设备需要接收该寻呼时，如果第一寻呼为新发送的寻呼，则终端设备接收该第一寻呼；如果第一寻呼为重复发送的寻呼，且终端设备在该第一寻呼之前未接收过寻呼，就接收该第一寻呼；或者，如果第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，且终端设备在该第一寻呼之前已经接收过寻呼，就不接收该第一寻呼。
应理解，终端设备未接收过寻呼包括但不限于：终端设备在第一寻呼之前一定的时间内(例如，N个寻呼周期内)和/或在当前驻留的服务小区上未接收过寻呼，或者终端设备在第一寻呼之前未接收过与该第一寻呼相同的寻呼。
还应理解，终端设备已接收过寻呼包括但不限于：终端设备在第一寻呼之前一定的时间内(例如，N个寻呼周期内)和/或在当前驻留的服务小区上已接收过寻呼，或者终端设备在第一寻呼之前已接收过与该第一寻呼相同的寻呼。
需要说明的是，终端设备在根据第一寻呼的类型确定不接收该第一寻呼，可以理解为：如果第一指示信息是网络设备在发送寻呼之前发送的，终端设备可以根据该第一指示信息确定第一寻呼的类型，如果第一指示信息指示该第一寻呼是重复寻呼且终端设备在此之前已经接收过该寻呼，那么终端设备接下来可以不用监听PO、也不用接收并解码寻呼消息；如果第一指示信息是网络设备在发送寻呼的同时发送的，例如，在寻呼DCI里发送，或者和寻呼DCI一起发送，那么终端设备需要在PO上监听第一指示信息，再根据第一指示信息判断该第一寻呼的类型，如果第一指示信息指示该第一寻呼是重复寻呼且终端设备在此之前已经接收过该寻呼，那么终端设备接下来可以不用接收解码对应的寻呼消息。
针对方式3：
可选地，在本申请一个实施例中，终端设备可以根据第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼或重复寻呼，再结合之前接收过的寻呼情况判断是否接收该第一寻呼。如果第一寻呼的第一指示信息与上一次接收的第一指示信息不同，确定该第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼，接收该第一寻呼；或者，如果第一寻呼的第一指示信息与上一次接收的第一指示信息相同，确定该第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，不接收该第一寻呼。
可选地，在本申请一个实施例中，终端设备还可以结合唤醒信号WUS机制判断是否接收寻呼。例如，在寻呼时机PO前或PO上接收网络设备发送的WUS，如果WUS指示终端设备需要接收寻呼，则终端设备使用上述方式根据第一指示信息和自己接收过的寻呼的情况判断是否接收第一寻呼；如果WUS指示终端设备不需要接收寻呼，则终端设备可不接收第一寻呼。
具体地，当WUS指示终端设备需要接收该寻呼时，如果第一寻呼为新发送的寻呼，则终端设备接收该第一寻呼；如果第一寻呼为重复发送的寻呼，且终端设备在该第一寻呼之前未接收过寻呼，就接收该第一寻呼；或者，如果第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，且终端设备在该第一寻呼之前已经接收过寻呼，就不接收该第一寻呼。
应理解，终端设备未接收过寻呼包括但不限于：终端设备在第一寻呼之前一定的时间内(例如，N个寻呼周期内)和/或在当前驻留的服务小区上未接收过寻呼，或者终端设备在第一寻呼之前未接收过与该第一寻呼相同的寻呼。
还应理解，终端设备已接收过寻呼包括但不限于：终端设备在第一寻呼之前一定的时间内(例如，N个寻呼周期内)和/或在当前驻留的服务小区上已接收过寻呼，或者终端设备在第一寻呼之前已接收过与该第一寻呼相同的寻呼。
需要说明的是，终端设备在根据第一寻呼的类型确定不接收该第一寻呼，也可以理解为：如果第一指示信息是网络设备在发送寻呼之前发送的，终端设备可以根据该第一指示信息确定第一寻呼的类型，如果第一指示信息指示该第一寻呼是重复寻呼且终端设备在此之前已经接收过该寻呼，那么终端设备接下来可以不用监听、接收并解码寻呼信息(包括寻呼DCI和寻呼消息)；如果第一指示信息是网络设备在发送寻呼时同时发送的，那么终端设备需要在PO上监听和接收寻呼DCI，再根据第一指示信息判断该第一寻呼的类型，从而才能确定是否解码对应的寻呼消息。
本申请实施例的技术方案，通过网络设备指示寻呼是否为新发送的寻呼或重复发送的寻呼，可以使得终端设备根据第一指示信息确定该第一寻呼的类型，并结合自己接收过的寻呼情况确定是否接收该第一寻呼，从而不需要每次都无区别地接收寻呼，能够尽量避免不相关的终端设备重复地获取之前已接收过的寻呼信息，减少因不必要的监听、接收和解码寻呼消息导致的额外功耗。
应理解，本申请实施例的各种实施方式既可以单独实施，也可以结合实施，本申请实施例对此并不限定。
例如，在本申请实施例中，网络设备通过比特域的不同取值作为第一指示信息的实施方式与通过对相同的一组寻呼发送相同的字符、数值作为第一指示信息的实施方式可以单独实施，也可以结合实施。
应理解，本申请实施例中的具体的例子只是为了帮助本领域技术人员更好地理解本申请实施例，而非限制本申请实施例的范围。
还应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
图5示出了本申请的一例用于寻呼的方法的示意图。
为了便于理解方案，首先对本申请实施例中涉及到的一些概念作简单介绍。
驻留(camp)，终端设备驻留在某个小区，是指终端设备已完成小区选择/重选过程并已选定一个小区，终端设备在该小区上监听系统信息(System Information,SI)，以及(在大多数情况下)监听寻呼(paging)信息。
访问(visit)，终端设备访问过某个小区，是指UE在该小区上驻留过或接入过。
该方法包括：
S510，终端设备确定第一信息，该第一信息包括：终端设备驻留/访问过的一个或多个小区的小区标识信息和第二信息，该第二信息是终端设备在驻留/访问的一个或多个小区上的停留概率信息。
S520，终端设备向网络设备发送该第一信息，网络设备接收并保存终端设备发送的第一信息，该第一信息用于确定寻呼范围。
可选地，该第一信息还包括：在第一时段内，该终端设备在一个或多个小区上的停留概率信息；或者，在第一小区上，该终端设备在多个时段内的停留概率信息。
具体地，终端设备向网络设备发送该第一信息，包括：终端设备向核心网设备和/或无线接入网设备发送自己可能驻留/访问小区的第一信息，下面针对终端设备具体的发送方式分别进行说明。
需要说明的是，根据触发寻呼的网元不同，寻呼可以分为：核心网(Core Network,CN)触发的CN寻呼和无线接入网(Radio Access Network,RAN)触发的RAN寻呼。网络可能对RRC_IDLE UE发起CN寻呼，对RRC_INACTIVE UE发起CN寻呼或RAN寻呼。
方式1：
可选地，在本申请一个实施例中，终端设备向核心网设备CN(例如，AMF)发送可能驻留或访问的第一信息，CN接收并保存终端设备发送的第一信息。
具体地，CN可以根据终端设备的驻留/访问小区的第一信息确定寻呼范围；或者，
CN可以在将终端设备的驻留/访问小区第一信息发送给终端设备的上一个服务基站last serving gNB，上一个服务基站last serving gNB根据终端设备的驻留/访问小区第一信息确定寻呼范围。
具体地，CN还可以在将终端设备的数据(data)发送给终端设备的上一个服务基站last serving gNB时携带终端设备的驻留/访问小区信息，上一个服务基站last serving gNB根据终端设备的驻留/访问小区的第一信息确定寻呼范围。
方式2：
可选地，在本申请一个实施例中，终端设备发送驻留或访问小区的第一信息给CN(例如，AMF)和RAN(例如，gNB)，CN和RAN接收并保存终端设备发送的驻留/访问小区的第一信息。
具体地，CN可以使用终端设备的驻留/访问小区的第一信息确定寻呼范围；RAN可以使用终端设备的驻留/访问小区的第一信息确定寻呼范围。
需要说明的是，终端设备发送的驻留或访问小区的第一信息包括但不限于，小区标识信息，终端设备在小区的停留概率信息，具体时间信息等。
其中，小区标识信息可以包括但不限于，小区的物理小区标识(Physical Cell Identifier,PCI)，小区的小区全球标识(Cell Global Identifier,CGI)，小区所属的公共陆地移动网(Public Land Mobile Network,PLMN)。
可选地，停留概率信息可以是具体的概率数值(例如，停留概率为0.2或20％)，也可以是概率等级(例如，停留概率为高，中，低等)，或者是其他形式。
需要说明的是，在本申请实施例中，停留概率可以是终端设备根据自己历史情况统计获得，也可以是网络设备根据终端设备发送的驻留或访问小区信息统计获得。例如，终端设备统计(一段时间内)驻留/访问某小区的次数以得到停留概率；或者，终端设备统计驻留/访问某小区的时长以得到停留概率等。
具体举例说明，假设在一天内，UE1只在小区A、小区B和小区C驻留/访问，其中，UE1驻留/访问小区A的次数为3次，时长为8h；UE1驻留/访问小区B的次数为5次，时长为12h；UE1驻留/访问小区C的次数为7次，时长为4h；则根据驻留/访问次数统计得到UE1在小区A、小区B和小区C的停留概率分别是1/5(低)、1/3(中)和7/15(高)；根据驻留/访问时长统计得到UE1在小区A、小区B和小区C的停留概率分别是1/3(中)、1/2(高)、1/6(低)。
需要说明的是，在本申请实施例中，网络可配置或者可在协议中规定停留概率的计算规则。例如，网络配置/协议规定参数/阈值用于确定停留概率等级等。
具体举例说明，可以将终端设备驻留/访问小区的时长、次数、具体时刻、最早/晚的接入/驻留时刻等作为参数，将多次统计结果量化的数值作为阈值用来确定终端设备的停留概率信息。例如，通过网络配置或在协议中规定，将终端设备在规定时间内(例如，24h)驻留/访问驻留/访问时长超过15h和/或终端设备在规定驻留或接入频率内(例如，10次)驻留/访问次数大于6次的一个或多个小区被确定为停留概率较高，可以作为该终端设备的寻呼范围。其中，时长15h和频率6次可以是规定的阈值。
进一步地，在本申请实施例中，还可以结合具体时间信息，从而更好地确定或优化目标终端设备的寻呼范围。例如，终端设备在各时段内的驻留/访问小区信息；或者，针对 各小区，终端设备在各时段内的停留概率信息。
具体地，终端设备发送时段1内的驻留小区以及可选的在各小区上的停留概率信息，时段2内的驻留小区以及可选的在各小区上的停留概率信息等。例如，UE1发送在时段1内驻留的小区有A、B和C，在各小区上的停留概率信息分别为20％、30％和50％；UE1发送在时段2内驻留的小区有A和D，在各小区上的停留概率信息为40％、60％。
或者，终端设备发送在小区1上各时段内的停留概率信息，在小区2上各时段内的停留概率信息等。例如，UE1发送在小区1上各时段内的停留概率信息分别为60％(例如，8:00-20:00)、25％(例如，20:00-24:00)和15％(例如，0:00-8:00)，UE1发送在小区2上各时段内的停留概率信息分别为40％(例如，8:00-20:00)、30％(例如，20:00-24:00)和20％(例如，0:00-8:00)。通过UE发送的驻留/访问小区信息，辅助网络设备确定或优化目标UE的寻呼范围。
需要说明的是，终端设备发送的第一信息不一定要针对所有的小区，可以是终端设备自己决定的(例如，只发送终端设备停留概率大的小区的信息)，或者可以是网络/协议规定的，如终端设备只发送满足一定条件的小区的信息(例如，网络/协议规定停留概率超过一定阈值的小区才需要上报)等，以上只是用于举例说明，不作限定。
S530，网络设备根据该第一信息确定终端设备的寻呼范围。
针对方式1：
具体地，CN可以根据终端设备的驻留/访问小区的第一信息确定寻呼范围；或者，
CN可以在将终端设备的驻留/访问小区的第一信息发送给终端设备的上一个服务基站last serving gNB，上一个服务基站last serving gNB根据终端设备的驻留/访问小区的第一信息确定寻呼范围。
具体地，CN还可以在将终端设备的数据(data)发送给终端设备的上一个服务基站last serving gNB时携带终端设备的驻留/访问小区的第一信息，上一个服务基站last serving gNB根据终端设备的驻留/访问小区的第一信息确定寻呼范围。
针对方式2：
具体地，CN可以使用终端设备的驻留/访问小区的第一信息确定寻呼范围；RAN可以使用终端设备的驻留/访问小区的第一信息确定寻呼范围。
需要说明的是，网络设备根据寻呼范围向终端设备发送寻呼，终端设备接收网络设备发送的寻呼，该寻呼用于寻呼该终端设备。例如：网络设备确定终端设备的寻呼范围的方式可以是：选择终端设备在当前时段内停留概率较高的一个或多个小区作为该终端设备的寻呼范围，并在该寻呼范围内发送寻呼。
应理解，本申请实施例的各种实施方式既可以单独实施，也可以结合实施，本申请实施例对此并不限定。
例如，本申请实施例中，终端设备发送自己的驻留或访问小区信息中小区标识信息、终端设备在小区的停留概率信息和具体时间信息，既可以单独实施，也可以结合实施。即网络设备确定目标终端设备寻呼范围的方式可以是根据终端设备发送的驻留或访问的小区信息中的小区标识信息确定；或者，网络设备确定目标终端设备寻呼范围的方式可以是选择终端设备停留概率较高的一个或多个小区作为该终端设备的寻呼范围；又或者，网络设备确定寻呼范围的方式可以是选择终端设备当前时段内停留概率较高的一个或多个小 区作为该终端设备的寻呼范围等。
本申请实施例的技术方案，通过终端设备发送自己的驻留或访问小区信息，可以使得网络设备进一步确定或优化寻呼范围，保证对被寻呼终端设备的寻呼成功概率，并减少对不相关区域内的不相关的终端设备的影响。即在网络设备需要终端设备发起寻呼时，能够确定(当前)终端设备可能或高概率停留的小区，因此可优先在终端设备可能或较大概率会停留的一个或多个小区内发起寻呼，从而降低系统内的寻呼虚警。
应理解，本申请实施例的各种实施方式既可以单独实施，也可以结合实施，本申请实施例对此并不限定。
应理解，本申请实施例中的具体的例子只是为了帮助本领域技术人员更好地理解本申请实施例，而非限制本申请实施例的范围。
还应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
图6示出了本申请的一例用于寻呼的方法的示意图。该方法包括：
S610，网络设备向终端设备发送该第一分组参数，终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一分组参数，该第一分组参数用于终端设备确定分组组号，该分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
需要说明的是，第一分组参数包括组号范围或组号偏移量，该组号范围包括第一组号范围和/或第二组号范围，该第一组号范围是无线资源控制空闲态RRC_IDLE终端设备的组号范围，该第一组号范围是无线资源控制非激活态RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的组号范围；该组号偏移量包括第一组号偏移量和/或第二组号偏移量，该第一组号偏移量是无线资源控制空闲态RRC_IDLE终端设备的组号偏移量，该第二组号偏移量是无线资源控制非激活态RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的组号偏移量。
网络设备通过划分idle UE和inactive UE使用的组号范围，或者给idle UE或inactive UE配置组号偏移量的方法，可以实现将idle UE和inactive UE分入到不同的UE分组内，即保证idle UE和inactive UE位于不同一组。
需要说明的是，网络设备不会对idle UE发送RAN寻呼，而只可能发送CN寻呼，但网络设备可能会对inactive UE发送RAN寻呼或CN寻呼。
下面分别通过3种具体的方式说明网络设备与终端设备之间如何收发第一分组参数。
可选地，网络设备广播第一分组参数；或者，网络设备通过无线资源控制RRC消息发送第一分组参数。
可选地，终端设备从广播消息中接收该第一分组参数；或者，终端设备从无线资源控制RRC消息中接收该第一分组参数。
需要说明的是，无线资源控制RRC消息可以是RRC释放消息。
方式1：
可选地，网络设备广播无线资源控制空闲态RRC_IDLE终端设备的第一组号范围和/或无线资源控制非激活态RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的第二组号范围。例如，假设网络设备广播的总分组个数为N，如果idle UE的组号范围为0～M，则inactive UE的第一组号范围为M+1～N，那么网络设备向终端设备发送针对idle UE的第一组号范围0～M，发送针对 inactive UE的第二组号范围M+1～N。
可选地，终端设备从广播消息中接收无线资源控制空闲态RRC_IDLE终端设备的第一组号范围和/或无线资源控制非激活态RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的第二组号范围。例如，相应地，终端设备接收网络设备发送的针对idle UE的第一组号范围0～M，接收针对inactive UE的第二组号范围M+1～N-1。
方式2：
可选地，网络设备广播无线资源控制空闲态RRC_IDLE终端设备的第一组号偏移量(offset)和/或无线资源控制非激活态RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的第二组号偏移量(offset)。例如，假设网络设备广播的idle UE或inactive UE的组号偏移量为W，那么网络设备向终端设备发送针对idle UE的第一组号偏移量W，或者发送针对inactive UE的第二组号偏移量W。
可选地，终端设备从广播消息中接收无线资源控制空闲态RRC_IDLE终端设备的第一组号偏移量和/或无线资源控制非激活态RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的第二组号偏移量。例如，相应地，终端设备接收网络设备发送的针对idle UE的第一组号偏移量W，或者接收针对inactive UE的第二组号偏移量W。
需要说明的是，组号偏移量W可以只针对一种RRC状态的UE。比如发送的第一组号偏移量是针对idle UE，那么inactive UE的分组组号无需偏移，从而尽量保证RRC_IDLE UE与RRC_INACTIVE UE分布在不同的组内。
方式3：
可选地，针对无线资源控制非激活态RRC_INACTIVE UE，网络设备可以在无线资源控制RRC消息中配置并发送inactive UE的第一分组参数，inactive UE的第二组号范围或第二组号偏移量等。例如，假设网络设备广播的总分组个数为N，将inactive UE的第二组号范围划分为M+1～N-1，那么网络设备向终端设备发送针对inactive UE的第二组号范围就是M+1～N-1；或者，假设网络设备广播的inactive UE的第二组号偏移量为W，那么网络设备向终端设备发送针对inactive UE的第二组号偏移量就是W。
可选地，终端设备从无线资源控制RRC消息中接收无线资源控制非激活态RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的第二组号范围或第二组号偏移量。例如，相应地，终端设备接收网络设备发送的针对inactive UE的第二组号范围是M+1～N-1；或者，终端设备接收网络设备发送的针对inactive UE的第二组号偏移量W。
S620，终端设备根据第一分组参数确定分组组号，该分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
可选地，无线资源控制空闲态RRC_IDLE终端设备根据第一组号范围或该第一组号偏移量确定分组组号；或者，无线资源控制非激活态RRC_INACTIVE终端设备根据第二组号范围或第二组号偏移量确定分组组号。
具体地，第一分组参数包括组号范围或组号偏移量，RRC_IDLE UE根据第一组号范围和/或组号偏移量确定用于寻呼的idle UE的分组组号；或者，RRC_INACTIVE UE根据第二组号范围或组号偏移量确定用于寻呼的inactive UE的分组组号。
下面针对终端设备根据第一分组参数确定分组组号的具体方式分别进行说明。
针对方式1：
可选地，终端设备确定自己的组号位于网络指示的组号范围内。例如，idle UE的组 号范围为0～M，则idle UE最终使用的组号需要属于0～M范围内。此时，inactive UE的组号范围为M+1～N-1，则inactive UE最终使用的组号需要属于M+1～N-1范围内。
一种可能的实现方式为：基于UE标识信息分组的方式，假设网络设备广播的UE分组个数为N，UE标识为UE_ID，则idle UE最终使用的组号group ID＝(UE_ID mod L)mod(M+1)，而inactive UE最终使用的组号group ID＝(UE_ID mod L)mod[N-(M+1)]+(M+1)。此处，idle UE和inactive UE的分组组号计算公式不作限定，只要能保证idle UE和inactive UE位于不同一组即可。
需要说明的是，UE_ID是网络设备和用户设备共识的，该UE_ID由网络设备配置，或者是用户设备在出厂时就已完成配置。UE_ID可以是IMSI(International Mobile Subscriber Identity)，MME分配的S-TMSI(SAE Temporary Mobile Station Identifier)或者AMF分配的5G-S-TMSI(SAE Temporary Mobile Station Identifier)。
具体举例说明，假设网络广播的UE分组个数为10，idle UE和inactive UE个数分别为50，其UE_ID分别为0～49，50～99。此时，idle UE的组号范围为0～3，则idle UE最终使用的组号需要属于0～3范围内，而inactive UE的组号范围为4～9，则inactive UE最终使用的组号需要属于4～9范围内。例如，当idle UE的UE_ID为5时，最终使用的组号group ID＝(5 mod 10)mod 3＝2，即UE_ID为5的idle UE的组号为2；再例如，当idle UE的UE_ID为39时，最终使用的组号group ID＝(39 mod 10)mod 3＝0，即UE_ID为39的idle UE的组号为0；或者，例如，当inactive UE的UE_ID为66时，最终使用的组号group ID＝(66 mod 10)mod 5+4＝5，即UE_ID为66的inactive UE的组号为5；再例如，当inactive UE的UE_ID为78时，最终使用的组号group ID＝(78 mod 10)mod 5+4＝7，即UE_ID为78的inactive UE的组号为7。有关其他UE的组号计算，此处不再赘述。
或者，另一种可能的实现方式为：基于UE被寻呼概率分组的方式，假设网络设备广播的UE分组个数为L，UE被寻呼概率为P，则idle UE最终使用的组号group ID＝(P mod L)mod M，而inactive UE最终使用的组号group ID＝(P mod L)mod[N-(M+1)]+(M+1)。此处，idle UE和inactive UE的分组组号计算公式不作限定，只要能保证idle UE和inactive UE位于不同一组即可。
具体举例说明，假设网络广播的UE分组个数为10，idle UE和inactive UE个数分别为50，其被寻呼概率为P分别为0％～49％，50％～99％。此时，idle UE的组号范围为0～3，则idle UE最终使用的组号需要属于0～3范围内，而inactive UE的组号范围为4～9，则inactive UE最终使用的组号需要属于4～9范围内。例如，当idle UE被寻呼概率为4％时，最终使用的组号group ID＝(4 mod 10)mod 3＝1，即被寻呼概率为4％的idle UE的组号为1；再例如，当idle UE被寻呼概率为48％时，最终使用的组号group ID＝(48 mod 10)mod 3＝2，即被寻呼概率为48％的idle UE的组号为2；或者，例如，当inactive UE被寻呼概率为53％时，最终使用的组号group ID＝(53 mod 10)mod 5+4＝7，即被寻呼概率为53％的inactive UE的组号为7；再例如，当inactive UE被寻呼概率为75％时，最终使用的组号group ID＝(75 mod 10)mod 5+4＝4，即被寻呼概率为75％的inactive UE的组号为4。有关其他UE的组号计算，此处不再赘述。
或者，另一种可能的实现方式为：假设分组的总个数为L，网络设备会广播分组和寻呼概率的对应关系，例如，组0对应寻呼概率0～20％，组2对应寻呼概率21％～40％等等。
针对方式2：
可选地，终端设备使用组号偏移量确定自己的组号。例如，idle UE的组号偏移量为W，则UE计算最终使用的组号时需要使用组号偏移量。
一种可能的实现方式为：基于UE标识信息分组的方式，假设网络广播的UE分组个数为L，UE标识为UE_ID，则idle UE最终使用的组号group ID＝(UE_ID mod L)±/*W，而inactive UE最终使用的组号group ID＝(UE_ID mod L)。此处，idle UE和inactive UE的分组组号计算公式不作限定，只要能保证idle UE和inactive UE位于不同一组即可。
也就是说，假设网络广播的UE分组个数为L，基于UE标识信息分组的方式，idle UE和inactive UE一定属于0～L-1的组号范围内。当idle UE的组号偏移量为W时，则idle UE的组号均不落在0～L-1的组号范围内。其中，W的取值大于或等于L。而inactive UE不发生组号偏移，此时inactive UE完全落在0～L-1的组号范围内。此时就能保证idle UE和inactive UE位于不同的一组。
具体举例说明，假设网络广播的UE分组个数为10，idle UE和inactive UE个数分别为50，其UE_ID分别为0～49，50～99。例如，基于UE标识信息分组的方式，若将idle UE和inactive UE平均分配在这10个组中。此时，设置idle UE的组号偏移量为11，组号偏移量的计算方式选用“+”，则UE计算最终使用的组号需要使用组号偏移量。当idle UE的UE_ID为5时，最终使用的组号group ID＝(5 mod 10)+11＝16，即UE_ID为5的idle UE的组号为16；再例如，当idle UE的UE_ID为27时，最终使用的组号group ID＝(27 mod 10)+11＝18，即UE_ID为27的idle UE的组号为18；又例如，当idle UE的UE_ID为39时，最终使用的组号group ID＝(39 mod 10)+11＝20，即UE_ID为39的idle UE的组号为20。在这种情况下，inactive UE所属的分组范围是0～9，而idle UE所属的分组范围是11～20，有关其他UE的组号计算，此处不再赘述。
或者，另一种可能的实现方式为：基于UE被寻呼概率分组的方式，假设网络广播的UE分组个数为L，UE被寻呼概率为P，则idle UE最终使用的组号group ID＝(P mod L)±/*W；而inactive UE最终使用的组号group ID＝(P mod L)。此处，idle UE和inactive UE的分组组号计算公式不作限定，偏移量的计算方法也不作限定，只要能保证idle UE和inactive UE位于不同一组即可。
也就是说，假设网络广播的UE分组个数为L，基于UE被寻呼概率分组的方式，idle UE和inactive UE一定属于0～L-1的组号范围内。当idle UE的组号偏移量为W时，则idle UE的组号均不落在0～L-1的组号范围内。其中，W的取值尽量大于L。而inactive UE不发生组号偏移，此时inactive UE完全落在0～L-1的组号范围内。此时就能保证idle UE和inactive UE位于不同的一组。
具体举例说明，假设网络广播的UE分组个数为10，idle UE和inactive UE个数分别为50，其被寻呼概率分别为0％～49％，50％～99％。例如，基于UE被寻呼概率分组的方式，若将idle UE和inactive UE不均匀地随机分配在这10个组中。此时，设置idle UE的组号偏移量为10，组号偏移量的计算方式选用“-”，则UE计算最终使用的组号需要使用组号偏移量。当idle UE的被寻呼概率为15％时，最终使用的组号group ID＝(11 mod 10)-10＝-9，即被寻呼概率为25％的idle UE的组号为-9；再例如，当idle UE被寻呼概率为21％时，最终使用的组号group ID＝(21 mod 10)-5＝-4，即被寻呼概率为21％的idle UE的组 号为-4；又例如，当idle UE的被寻呼概率为39％时，最终使用的组号group ID＝(39 mod 10)-10＝-1，即被寻呼概率为39％的idle UE的组号为-1。在这种情况下，inactive UE所属的分组范围是0～9，而idle UE所属的分组范围是-10～-1，有关其他UE的组号计算，此处不再赘述。
可选地，UE使用组号偏移量确定自己的组号。例如，inactive UE的组号偏移量为W，则UE计算最终使用的组号时需要使用组号偏移量。具体的分组组号计算方法与上述内容相同，此处不再赘述。
针对方式3：
特别地，针对RRC_INACTIVE UE，网络设备可以在RRC消息中配置inactive UE的第一分组参数。例如，基于UE标识信息分组的方式，终端设备确定自己的组号位于网络指示的组号范围内；或者，基于UE被寻呼概率分组的方式，终端设备使用组号偏移量确定自己的组号等。具体的实现方式与上述方式1和方式2的对应方法相同，这里不再赘述。
需要说明的是，网络设备根据分组组号向终端设备发送寻呼。
可选地，网络设备在发送寻呼前或发生寻呼的同时发送RRC_IDLE UE的分组组号和RRC_INACTIVE UE的分组组号。例如，带有分组组号的寻呼信息如果在寻呼时机PO前发送，则不相关的终端设备可以不接收、不解码寻呼消息；或者，带有分组组号的寻呼信息如果在寻呼时机PO上发送，则不相关的终端设备需要接收寻呼消息，但是可以不解码寻呼消息。本申请实施例的方案可以避免不相关UE的因不必要的寻呼接收而造成的额外功耗。
具体地，在完成RRC_IDLE UE和RRC_INACTIVE UE分组之后，当网络设备需要发起寻呼时，针对idle UE和inactive UE的分组组号，网络设备可以直接对目标终端设备所在的组号发送寻呼。例如，假设网络设备需要寻呼UE1和UE2，UE1根据第一分组参数确定自己所在的组号是第5组，UE2根据第一分组参数确定自己所在的组号是第8组，那么网络设备只需要针对第5组和第8组发送寻呼信息(包括寻呼DCI和寻呼消息)，第5组和第8组的终端设备根据本申请提供的方案进一步确定寻呼类型，以及结合之前接收过的寻呼情况进一步判断是否接收寻呼消息即可，而其他组号内的终端设备则无需监听、接收和解码寻呼信息。这样做既提高了对目标UE1和UE2寻呼的成功概率，又降低了网络设备发送寻呼的功耗，以及尽量避免了不相关的终端设备无区别地接收不必要的寻呼消息，从而降低寻呼虚警。
本申请实施例的技术方案，通过网络设备向终端设备发送第一分组参数，不同RRC状态的终端设备对应不同的分组参数，该第一分组参数用于确定终端设备分组组号，可以使得RRC_IDLE和RRC_INACTIVE UE分别根据第一分组参数中对应的第一组号范围和第二组号范围计算自己的组号，从而可以实现将idle UE和inactive UE分到不同的组内，可以避免当网络设备对inactive UE频繁地发起RAN寻呼时，影响idle UE频繁地进行不必要的RAN寻呼接收，产生不必要的功耗。
需要说明的是，实际中网络设备对inactive UE发起寻呼的概率可能会高于对idle UE发起寻呼的概率，将idle UE和inactive UE分入不同组内，可避免网络对inactive UE较频繁的寻呼影响idle UE频繁地进行不必要的寻呼接收。
应理解，本申请实施例的各种实施方式既可以单独实施，也可以结合实施，本申请实 施例对此并不限定。
应理解，本申请实施例中的具体的例子只是为了帮助本领域技术人员更好地理解本申请实施例，而非限制本申请实施例的范围。
还应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
基于图6所示的用于寻呼的方法类似，具体地，图7示出了本申请的另一例用于寻呼的方法的示意图。如图7所示，网络设备与终端设备通过协商确定第二分组参数，网络设备确定第二分组参数，即与终端设备分组相关的信息，终端设备根据该第一分组参数确定分组组号。具体地确定分组组号的实现步骤如下该：
S710，终端设备向核心网设备发送第二分组参数，核心网设备接收终端设备发送的第二分组参数，该第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
应理解，第二分组参数可以是但不限于，与终端设备的业务相关的参数。例如：终端设备的业务需求等级。例如，现有高、中、低三个业务需求等级，终端设备UE1将自己期望的业务需求等级确定为高级，并向核心网设备发送该第二分组参数，核心网设备接收到终端设备UE1对应的业务等级是高级。
具体地，终端设备可以基于以下任意一个或多个内容来确定第二分组参数，即与终端设备分组相关的信息，包括：终端设备的业务的服务质量(Quality of Service,QoS)参数。例如，包时延预算(Packet Delay Budget,PDB)，包错误率(Packet Error Rate,PER)，优先级等级(Default Priority Level)等；和/或，终端设备的业务类型。例如，增强移动宽带(enhanced Mobile Broadband,eMBB)业务，超可靠低时延寻呼(Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication,URLLC)业务，海量机器类寻呼(massive Machine Type of Communication,mMTC)业务等；和/或，终端设备的移动性状态(mobility state)或移动速度等。
具体地，终端设备给核心网设备发送自己期望的分组相关信息；核心网设备接受终端设备期望的分组相关信息。例如：第二分组参数为终端设备的业务需求等级。假设现有高、中、低三个业务需求等级，终端设备UE1将自己期望的业务需求等级确定为高级，并向网络设备发送该业务需求等级，网络设备在接收到该第二分组信息时，接收并同意终端设备期望的第二分组参数，从而网络设备和终端设备达成共识，该第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组。
可选地，终端设备将自己期望的第二分组参数发给网络设备后，网络设备也可以拒绝该第二分组参数，然后向终端设备发送反馈信息。终端设备在接到该反馈信息后，会调整业务需求等级，重新发送第二分组参数；或者，
终端也可以不继续发送第二分组参数。
S720，核心网设备向接入网设备发送第二分组参数，接入网设备接收核心网设备发送的第二分组参数，该第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
具体地，接入网设备在对终端设备发送寻呼时，会根据第二分组参数和第四分组参数确定终端设备的分组组号，然后根据分组组号发送寻呼。假设接入网设备需要寻呼终端设备UE1，此时UE1的分组组号是1组，那么接入网设备只需要对终端设备UE1所在的1 号组发送寻呼即可。
S730，核心网设备确定并向接入网设备发送第三分组参数，接入网设备接收核心网设备发送的第三分组参数，该第三分组参数用于确定第四分组参数。
可选地，该第三分组参数，即与终端设备分组相关的信息可以是但不限于，与终端设备的业务相关的参数，比如，当与UE分组相关的信息是业务需求等级的情况，所有可能的业务需求等级。例如，现有高、中、低三个业务需求等级，核心网设备将这三个业务需求等级对应地划分为三个组。
需要说明的是，第二分组参数是针对具体的终端设备所对应的业务需求等级，例如UE1、UE2的业务需求等级分别为高、低。而第三分组参数是核心网设备针对所管辖范围内的所有终端设备的业务需求进行等级划分的分组相关信息，对于与UE分组相关的信息是业务需求等级的情况。例如网络设备将所有终端设备的业务需求等级划分为高、中、低三个档次，将这一划分规则与划分结果作为第三分组参数发送给基站，供基站根据第三分组参数确定第四分组参数，其中，第四分组参数包括：每个业务需求等级对应终端设备的组号或组号范围。
具体地，核心网设备在对终端设备发起寻呼时，将终端设备特定的与终端设备分组相关的信息发送给基站。例如，对于与终端设备分组相关的信息是业务需求等级的情况，核心网设备可以将所有可能的业务需求等级通知给基站。假设网络设备将所有终端设备的业务需求等级划分为高、中、低三个档次，对应的分为三个组，将这一划分规则与划分结果作为第三分组参数发送给基站，供基站根据第三分组参数确定第四分组参数。
需要说明的是，终端设备也可以将第二分组信息发送给无线接入网设备。
S740，接入网设备根据第三分组参数确定第四分组参数。
具体地，该第四分组参数包括但不限于：每个业务需求等级对应终端设备使用的组号范围，和/或组号。例如，接入网设备可以根据接收的终端设备的业务等级为高、中、低三个等级，将其对应地划分组号为A组、B组和C组，或者接入网设备对应地将高、中、低等级的终端设备所属的组号范围分别设置为0-2组、3-4组和5-7组。
S750，接入网设备向终端设备广播第四分组参数，或网络设备通过RRC消息向终端设备发送第四分组参数，终端设备从广播消息中或者无线资源控制RRC消息中接收接入网设备发送的第四分组参数，该第四分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
具体地，例如，对于第三分组参数是终端设备业务需求等级的情况，接入网设备可以发送每个业务需求等级对应的组号或组号范围，终端设备接收每个业务需求等级对应的组号或组号范围。假设，网络设备将所有终端设备的业务需求等级划分为高、中、低三个档次，对应的分为6个组，组号范围分别是0～2组、3～4组、5组。那么无线接入网设备就可以将该规则发送给终端设备。
S760，终端设备根据第四分组参数和第二分组参数确定分组组号，该分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
具体地，终端设备接收网络设备发送的每个业务需求等级对应的组号或组号范围，终端设备接收每个业务需求等级对应的组号或组号范围。假设，网络设备将所有终端设备的业务需求等级划分为高、中、低三个档次，对应的分为6个组，组号范围分别是0～2组、3～4组、5组。那么终端设备接收无线接入网设备发送的与业务需求等级相关的分组规则 后，根据第二分组参数确定自己的业务需求等级，进一步地确认自己所属的组号。
S770，接入网设备根据根据第四分组参数和第二分组参数确定分组组号，该分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
可选地，核心网(在对终端设备发起寻呼时)将终端设备特定的与终端设备分组相关的信息发送给接入网设备，或者终端设备将自己特定的与终端设备分组相关的信息发送给基站。例如，对于与终端设备分组相关的信息是业务需求等级的情况，核心网(在对终端设备发起寻呼时)将终端设备的业务需求等级发送给接入网设备，或者终端设备将自己的业务需求等级发送给接入网设备。在发送针对某终端设备的寻呼时，基站根据该终端设备特定的与终端设备分组相关的信息确定该终端设备的分组，进行寻呼。
本申请实施例的技术方案，通过终端设备和核心网设备根据终端设备的特性协商与终端设备分组相关的信息，可以实现将特性相同或相似的终端设备分入相同组内。其中，根据终端设备的业务特性进行终端设备分组可以将业务类型或业务需求相同/相似的终端设备分入同一组内，尽量保证本次被寻呼的终端设备属于相同的组，从而降低不相关的终端设备被寻呼到的概率；根据移动特性进行终端设备分组可以将移动性状态或速度相同或相似的终端设备分入同一组内，可以尽量避免网络对移动性高或速度大的终端设备的寻呼对移动性低或速度小的终端设备产生不必要的寻呼。
应理解，本申请实施例中的具体的例子只是为了帮助本领域技术人员更好地理解本申请实施例，而非限制本申请实施例的范围。
还应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
与图7类似的，图8示出了本申请的另一例用于寻呼的方法的示意图，具体地确定分组组号的实现步骤如下该：
S810，终端设备向核心网设备发送第二分组参数，核心网设备接收终端设备发送的第二分组参数，该第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
应理解，第二分组参数可以是但不限于，与终端设备的业务相关的参数。例如：终端设备的业务需求等级。例如，现有高、中、低三个业务需求等级，终端设备UE1将自己期望的业务需求等级确定为高级。
具体地，终端设备可以基于以下任意一个或多个内容来确定第二分组参数，即与终端设备分组相关的信息，包括：终端设备的业务的服务质量(Quality of Service,QoS)参数。例如，包时延预算(Packet Delay Budget,PDB)，包错误率(Packet Error Rate,PER)，优先级等级(Default Priority Level)等；和/或，终端设备的业务类型。例如，增强移动宽带(enhanced Mobile Broadband,eMBB)业务，超可靠低时延寻呼(Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication,URLLC)业务，海量机器类寻呼(massive Machine Type of Communication,mMTC)业务等；和/或，终端设备的移动性状态(mobility state)或移动速度等。
具体地，终端设备给核心网设备发送自己期望的分组相关信息；核心网设备接受终端设备期望的分组相关信息。例如：第二分组参数为终端设备的业务需求等级。假设现有高、中、低三个业务需求等级，终端设备UE1将自己期望的业务需求等级确定为高级，并向 网络设备发送该业务需求等级，网络设备在接收到该终端设备UE1发送的期望的业务需求等级。
S820，核心网设备更新并向终端设备发送更新后的第二分组参数，终端设备接收核心网设备发送的更新后的第二分组参数，第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
应理解，更新的第二分组参数可以是但不限于，与终端设备的业务相关的参数。例如：终端设备的业务需求等级。例如，现有高、中、低三个业务需求等级，终端设备UE1将自己期望的业务需求等级确定为高级，并向网络设备发送该业务需求等级，网络设备在接收到该第二分组信息时，认为该期望的第二分组参数与终端设备UE的业务需求等级实际上不匹配，所以网络设备会更新终端设备UE1的业务需求等级为中，并将更新的第二分组参数通知终端设备，该第二分组参数同样用于确定终端设备的分组。
具体地，终端设备可以基于以下任意一个或多个内容来确定更新的第二分组参数，即与终端设备分组相关的信息，包括：终端设备的业务的服务质量(Quality of Service,QoS)参数。例如，包时延预算(Packet Delay Budget,PDB)，包错误率(Packet Error Rate,PER)，优先级等级(Default Priority Level)等；和/或，终端设备的业务类型。例如，增强移动宽带(enhanced Mobile Broadband,eMBB)业务，超可靠低时延寻呼(Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication,URLLC)业务，海量机器类寻呼(massive Machine Type of Communication,mMTC)业务等；和/或，终端设备的移动性状态(mobility state)或移动速度等。
S830，核心网设备向接入网设备发送第二分组参数，接入网设备接收核心网设备发送的第二分组参数，该第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
具体地，接入网设备在对终端设备发送寻呼时，会根据第二分组参数和第四分组参数确定终端设备的分组组号，然后根据分组组号发送寻呼。假设接入网设备需要寻呼终端设备UE1，此时UE1的分组组号是1组，那么接入网设备只需要寻呼终端设备UE1所在的1号组发送寻呼即可。
S840，核心网设备确定并向接入网设备发送第三分组参数，接入网设备接收核心网设备发送的第三分组参数，该第三分组参数用于确定第四分组参数。
可选地，该第三分组参数，即与终端设备分组相关的信息可以是但不限于，与终端设备的业务相关的参数，比如，与UE分组相关的信息是业务需求等级的情况，所有可能的业务需求等级。例如，现有高、中、低三个业务需求等级，核心网设备将这三个业务需求等级对应地划分为三个组。
需要说明的是，第二分组参数是针对具体的终端设备所对应的业务需求等级，例如UE1、UE2的业务需求等级分别为高、低。而第三分组参数是核心网设备针对所管辖范围内的所有终端设备的业务需求进行等级划分的分组相关信息，对于与UE分组相关的信息是业务需求等级的情况。例如网络设备将所有终端设备的业务需求等级划分为高、中、低三个档次，对应的分为三个组，将这一划分规则与划分结果作为第三分组参数发送给基站，供基站根据第三分组参数确定第四分组参数，其中，第四分组参数包括：每个业务需求等级对应终端设备的组号范围或组号。
具体地，核心网设备在对终端设备发起寻呼时，将终端设备特定的与终端设备分组相关的信息发送给基站。例如，对于与终端设备分组相关的信息是业务需求等级的情况，核 心网设备可以将所有可能的业务需求等级通知给基站。假设网络设备将所有终端设备的业务需求等级划分为高、中、低三个档次，对应的分为三个组，将这一划分规则与划分结果作为第三分组参数发送给基站，供基站根据第三分组参数确定第四分组参数。
需要说明的是，终端设备也可以将第二分组信息发送给无线接入网设备。
S850，接入网设备根据核心网设备发送的第三分组参数确定第四分组参数，该第四分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
具体地，该第四分组参数包括但不限于：每个业务需求等级对应终端设备使用的组号范围，和/或组号。例如，接入网设备可以根据接收的终端设备的业务等级为高、中、低三个等级，将其对应地划分组号为A组、B组和C组，或者接入网设备对应地将高、中、低等级的终端设备所属的组号范围分别设置为0-2组、3-4组和5-7组。
S860，接入网设备向终端设备广播第四分组参数，或者接入网设备通过无线资源控制RRC消息向终端设备发送第四分组参数，终端设备从广播消息中或者无线资源控制RRC消息中接收接入网设备发送的第四分组参数，该第四分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
具体地，例如，对于第三分组参数是终端设备业务需求等级的情况，接入网设备可以发送每个业务需求等级对应的组号或组号范围，终端设备接收每个业务需求等级对应的组号或组号范围。假设，网络设备将所有终端设备的业务需求等级划分为高、中、低三个档次，对应的分为6个组，组号范围分别是0～2组、3～4组、5组。那么无线接入网设备就可以将该规则发送给终端设备。
S870，终端设备根据接入网设备发送的第四分组参数和更新后的第二分组参数确定分组组号，该分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
具体地，终端设备接收网络设备发送的每个业务需求等级对应的组号或组号范围，终端设备接收每个业务需求等级对应的组号或组号范围。假设，网络设备将所有终端设备的业务需求等级划分为高、中、低三个档次，对应的分为6个组，组号范围分别是0～2组、3～4组、5组。那么终端设备接收无线接入网设备发送的与业务需求等级相关的分组规则后，根据第二分组参数确定自己的业务需求等级，进一步地确认自己所属的组号。
S880，接入网设备根据第四分组参数和更新后的第二分组参数确定分组组号，该分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
可选地，核心网(在对终端设备发起寻呼时)将终端设备特定的与终端设备分组相关的信息发送给接入网设备，或者终端设备将自己特定的与终端设备分组相关的信息发送给基站。例如，对于与终端设备分组相关的信息是业务需求等级的情况，核心网(在对终端设备发起寻呼时)将终端设备的业务需求等级发送给接入网设备，或者终端设备将自己的业务需求等级发送给接入网设备。在发送针对某终端设备的寻呼时，基站根据该终端设备特定的与终端设备分组相关的信息确定该终端设备的分组，进行寻呼。
本申请实施例的技术方案，通过终端设备和核心网设备根据终端设备的特性协商与终端设备分组相关的信息，可以实现将特性相同或相似的终端设备分入相同组内。其中，根据终端设备的业务特性进行终端设备分组可以将业务类型或业务需求相同/相似的终端设备分入同一组内，尽量保证本次被寻呼的终端设备属于相同的组，从而降低不相关的终端设备被寻呼到的概率；根据移动特性进行终端设备分组可以将移动性状态或速度相同或相 似的终端设备分入同一组内，可以尽量避免网络对移动性高或速度大的终端设备的寻呼对移动性低或速度小的终端设备产生不必要的寻呼。
应理解，本申请实施例中的具体的例子只是为了帮助本领域技术人员更好地理解本申请实施例，而非限制本申请实施例的范围。
还应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
与图8类似的，图9示出了本申请的另一例用于寻呼的方法的示意图，具体地确定分组组号的实现步骤如下该：
S910，核心网设备向终端设备发送第二分组参数，终端设备接收核心网设备发送的第二分组参数，该第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
应理解，第二分组参数可以是但不限于，与终端设备的业务相关的参数。例如：终端设备的业务需求等级。例如，现有高、中、低三个业务需求等级，终端设备UE1将自己期望的业务需求等级确定为高级。
具体地，终端设备可以基于以下任意一个或多个内容来确定第二分组参数，即与终端设备分组相关的信息，包括：终端设备的业务的服务质量(Quality of Service,QoS)参数。例如，包时延预算(Packet Delay Budget,PDB)，包错误率(Packet Error Rate,PER)，优先级等级(Default Priority Level)等；和/或，终端设备的业务类型。例如，增强移动宽带(enhanced Mobile Broadband,eMBB)业务，超可靠低时延寻呼(Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication,URLLC)业务，海量机器类寻呼(massive Machine Type of Communication,mMTC)业务等；和/或，终端设备的移动性状态(mobility state)或移动速度等。
具体地，核心网设备确定终端设备的业务需求等级，直接向终端设备发送第二分组参数。例如：第二分组参数为终端设备的业务需求等级。假设现有高、中、低三个业务需求等级，网络设备根据终端设备的业务相关的参数，将UE1的业务需求等级确定为高级，并向终端设备发送该业务需求等级，终端设备UE1接收来自网络设备发送的业务需求等级为高，二者达成共识，该第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组。
S920，核心网设备向接入网设备发送第二分组参数，接入网设备接收核心网设备发送的第二分组参数，该第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
具体地，接入网设备在对终端设备发送寻呼时，会根据第二分组参数和第四分组参数确定终端设备的分组组号，然后根据分组组号发送寻呼。假设接入网设备需要寻呼终端设备UE1，此时UE1的分组组号是1组，那么接入网设备只需要寻呼终端设备UE1所在的1号组即可。
S930，核心网设备确定并向接入网设备发送第三分组参数，接入网设备接收核心网设备发送的第三分组参数，该第三分组参数用于确定第四分组参数。
可选地，该第三分组参数，即与终端设备分组相关的信息可以是但不限于，与终端设备的业务相关的参数，比如，与UE分组相关的信息是业务需求等级的情况，所有可能的业务需求等级。例如，现有高、中、低三个业务需求等级，核心网设备将这三个业务需求等级对应地划分为三个组。
需要说明的是，第二分组参数是针对具体的终端设备所对应的业务需求等级，例如UE1、UE2的业务需求等级分别为高、低。而第三分组参数是核心网设备针对所管辖范围内的所有终端设备的业务需求进行等级划分的分组相关信息，对于与UE分组相关的信息是业务需求等级的情况。例如网络设备将所有终端设备的业务需求等级划分为高、中、低三个档次，对应的分为三个组，将这一划分规则与划分结果作为第三分组参数发送给基站，供基站根据第三分组参数确定第四分组参数，其中，第四分组参数包括：每个业务需求等级对应终端设备的组号范围和/或组号。
具体地，核心网设备在对终端设备发起寻呼时，将终端设备特定的与终端设备分组相关的信息发送给基站。例如，对于与终端设备分组相关的信息是业务需求等级的情况，核心网设备可以将所有可能的业务需求等级通知给基站。假设网络设备将所有终端设备的业务需求等级划分为高、中、低三个档次，对应的分为三个组，将这一划分规则与划分结果作为第三分组参数发送给基站，供基站根据第三分组参数确定第四分组参数。
需要说明的是，终端设备也可以将第二分组信息发送给无线接入网设备。
S940，接入网设备根据核心网设备发送的第三分组参数确定第四分组参数，该第四分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
具体地，该第四分组参数包括但不限于：每个业务需求等级对应终端设备使用的组号范围，和/或组号。例如，接入网设备可以根据接收的终端设备的业务等级为高、中、低三个等级，将其对应地划分组号为A组、B组和C组，或者接入网设备对应地将高、中、低等级的终端设备所属的组号范围分别设置为0-2组、3-4组和5-7组。
S950，接入网设备向终端设备广播第四分组参数或接入网设备通过RRC消息向终端设备发送第四分组参数，终端设备从广播消息中或者无线资源控制RRC消息中接收接入网设备发送的第四分组参数，该第四分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
具体地，例如，对于第三分组参数是终端设备业务需求等级的情况，接入网设备可以发送每个业务需求等级对应的组号或组号范围，终端设备接收每个业务需求等级对应的组号或组号范围。假设，网络设备将所有终端设备的业务需求等级划分为高、中、低三个档次，对应的分为6个组，组号范围分别是0～2组、3～4组、5组。那么无线接入网设备就可以将该规则发送给终端设备。
S960，终端设备根据第二分组参数和第四分组参数确定分组组号，该分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
具体地，终端设备接收网络设备发送的每个业务需求等级对应的组号或组号范围，终端设备接收每个业务需求等级对应的组号或组号范围。假设，网络设备将所有终端设备的业务需求等级划分为高、中、低三个档次，对应的分为6个组，组号范围分别是0～2组、3～4组、5组。那么终端设备接收无线接入网设备发送的与业务需求等级相关的分组规则后，根据第二分组参数确定自己的业务需求等级，进一步地确认自己所属的组号。
S970，接入网设备根据第二分组参数和第四分组参数确定分组组号，该分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
可选地，核心网(在对终端设备发起寻呼时)将终端设备特定的与终端设备分组相关的信息发送给接入网设备，或者终端设备将自己特定的与终端设备分组相关的信息发送给基站。例如，对于与终端设备分组相关的信息是业务需求等级的情况，核心网(在对终端 设备发起寻呼时)将终端设备的业务需求等级发送给接入网设备，或者终端设备将自己的业务需求等级发送给接入网设备。在发送针对某终端设备的寻呼时，基站根据该终端设备特定的与终端设备分组相关的信息确定该终端设备的分组，进行寻呼。
本申请实施例的技术方案，通过终端设备和核心网设备根据终端设备的特性协商与终端设备分组相关的信息，可以实现将特性相同或相似的终端设备分入相同组内。其中，根据终端设备的业务特性进行终端设备分组可以将业务类型或业务需求相同/相似的终端设备分入同一组内，尽量保证本次被寻呼的终端设备属于相同的组，从而降低不相关的终端设备被寻呼到的概率；根据移动特性进行终端设备分组可以将移动性状态或速度相同或相似的终端设备分入同一组内，可以尽量避免网络对移动性高或速度大的终端设备的寻呼对移动性低或速度小的终端设备产生不必要的寻呼。
应理解，本申请实施例中的具体的例子只是为了帮助本领域技术人员更好地理解本申请实施例，而非限制本申请实施例的范围。
还应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
上文中详细描述了根据本申请实施例的降低寻呼虚警的方法，下面将描述根据本申请实施例的降低寻呼虚警的装置。
根据前述方法，图10为本申请实施例提供的寻呼装置1000的示意图。
其中，该装置1000可以为网络设备，也可以为芯片或电路，比如可设置于网络设备的芯片或电路。
该装置1000可以包括处理器1010，可选地，还可以包括存储器1020。该存储器1020用于存储指令。
一种可能的方式中，该处理器1010用于执行该存储器1020存储的指令，以使装置1000实现如上述方法中网络设备执行的步骤。
进一步的，该装置1000还可以包括输入口1030(即，寻呼单元的一例)和输出口1040(即，收发单元的另一例)。进一步的，该处理器1010、存储器1020、输入口1030和输出口1040可以通过内部连接通路互相寻呼，传递控制和/或数据信号。该存储器1020用于存储计算机程序，该处理器1010可以用于从该存储器1020中调用并运行该计算计程序，完成上述方法中网络设备的步骤。该存储器1020可以集成在处理器1010中，也可以与处理器1010分开设置。
可选地，一种可能的方式中，该输入口1030可以为接收器，该输出口1040为发送器。其中，接收器和发送器可以为相同或者不同的物理实体。为相同的物理实体时，可以统称为收发器。
可选地，一种可能的方式中，该输入口1030为输入接口，该输出口1040为输出接口。
作为一种实现方式，输入口1030和输出口1040的功能可以考虑通过收发电路或者收发的专用芯片实现。处理器1010可以考虑通过专用处理芯片、处理电路、处理器或者通用芯片实现。
作为另一种实现方式，可以考虑使用通用计算机的方式来实现本申请实施例提供的网络设备。即将实现处理器1010、输入口1030和输出口1040功能的程序代码存储在存储 器1020中，通用处理器通过执行存储器1020中的代码来实现处理器1010、输入口1030和输出口1040的功能。
当该装置1000为核心网设备时，该核心网设备包括处理器、存储器以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对寻呼协议以及寻呼数据进行处理，以及对终端设备进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据等。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。输入输出装置用于从其他设备(例如，接入网设备或其他核心网设备)接收数据，和/或向其他设备发送数据。此情况下，可以将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备的处理器1010。处理器1010也可以称为处理器，处理单板，处理模块、处理装置等。并且，此情况下，可以将接收机、接收器、或接收电路等视为输入口1030。可以将发射机、发射器或者发射电路等视为输出口1040。
当该寻呼装置1000为芯片时，该芯片包括收发电路和处理电路。其中，收发电路可以是输入/输出电路或寻呼接口；处理电路可以为该芯片上集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。输入电路可以为输入管脚，输出电路可以为输出管脚，处理电路可以为晶体管、门电路、触发器和各种逻辑电路等。输入电路所接收的输入的信号可以是由例如但不限于接收器接收并输入的，输出电路所输出的信号可以是例如但不限于输出给发射器并由发射器发射的，且输入电路和输出电路可以是不同的电路，也可以是同一电路，这种情况下该电路在不同的时刻分别用作输入电路和输出电路。
在一种实现方式中，输出口1040用于发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于确定第一寻呼的类型，该第一寻呼的类型包括：非重复寻呼或重复寻呼。
可选地，该输出口1040具体用于：
如果该第一寻呼类型为非重复寻呼，发送该第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于确定该第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼；或者，
如果该第一寻呼类型为重复寻呼，发送该第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于确定该第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼。
可选地，该输出口1040具体还用于：
如果多个寻呼为相同的寻呼，发送相同的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于确定第一寻呼的类型，该第一寻呼是多个寻呼中的任意一个寻呼。
在另一种实现方式中，输入口1030用于接收第一信息，该第一信息是终端设备在驻留/访问的一个或多个小区上的停留概率信息，该第一信息用于确定终端设备的寻呼范围，该寻呼范围用于网络设备发送寻呼。
存储单元1020用于保存驻留/访问的小区停留概率信息。
处理器1010用于根据该第一信息确定终端设备的寻呼范围。
输出口1040用于根据该寻呼范围发送寻呼，该寻呼用于寻呼该终端设备。
可选地，该处理器1010具体用于：
如果核心网接收该第一信息，且该核心网发送寻呼，该核心网根据该第一信息确定寻呼范围；或者，
如果接入网接收该第一信息且该接入网发送寻呼，该接入网根据该第一信息确定寻呼范围；或者，
如果核心网接收该第一信息，且接入网发送寻呼，该核心网向该终端设备的上一个服 务基站last serving gNB发送该终端设备数据和该第一信息，该上一个服务基站last serving gNB根据该第一信息确定寻呼范围。
在另一种实现方式中，输出口1040用于发送第一分组参数，该第一分组参数用于确定无线资源控制空闲态RRC_IDLE终端设备和无线资源控制非激活态RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的分组组号，该分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
该处理器1010用于根据该分组组号发送寻呼，该寻呼用于寻呼该终端设备。
可选地，输出口1040用于广播该第一分组参数；或者，
通过无线资源控制RRC消息发送该第一分组参数。
可选地，该输出口1040具体用于：
如果基于UE标识信息分组或者UE的被寻呼概率分组等，则网络设备广播RRC_IDLE和RRC_INACTIVE UE使用的组号范围。例如，idle UE的组号范围为0～M，inactive UE的组号范围为M+1～N；
如果基于UE标识信息分组或者UE的被寻呼概率分组等，则网络设备广播RRC_IDLE或RRC_INACTIVE UE使用的组号偏移量(offset)。例如，idle UE或inactive UE的组号偏移量为M；
如果针对RRC_INACTIVE UE，与上述方式1和方式2的对应方法相同，则网络设备可以在RRC消息中配置inactive UE的第一分组参数，例如，inactive UE的组号范围或组号偏移量等。
在另一种实现方式中，当该装置1000为核心网设备时，输入口1030用于接收终端设备发送的第二分组参数，例如，终端设备的业务需求等级，该第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
输出口1040用于向接入网设备发送第二分组参数，该第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
输出口1040用于向接入网设备发送第三分组参数，该第三分组参数用于确定第四分组参数，该第四分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号，该第四分组参数和该第二分组参数用于接入网设备发送寻呼。
可选地，输入口1030还用于不接收终端设备发送的第二分组参数。
可选地，输出口1040还用于发送更新后的第二分组参数，该更新后的第二分组参数是根据终端设备发送的第二分组参数确定的，该第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
可选地，处理器1010用于确定第二分组参数，该第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
可选地，输出口1040还用于向终端设备发送第二分组参数。
当该装置1000为接入网设备时，输入口1030用于接收第二分组参数，该第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
输入口1030还用于接收核心网设备发送的第三分组参数，该第三分组参数用于确定第四分组参数。
处理器1010用于根据该第三分组参数确定该第四分组参数。
输出口1040用于向终端设备发送该第四分组参数，该第四分组参数用于确定终端设 备的分组组号。
具体地，输出口1040用于向终端设备广播该第四分组参数；或者，
通过无线资源控制RRC消息发送该第四分组参数。
其中，以上列举的装置1000中各模块或单元的功能和动作仅为示例性说明，当该装置1000配置在或本身即为核心网设备时，装置1000中各模块或单元可以用于执行上述方法中核心网设备所执行的各动作或处理过程。这里，为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。
该装置1000所涉及的与本申请实施例提供的技术方案相关的概念，解释和详细说明及其他步骤请参见前述方法或其他实施例中关于这些内容的描述，此处不做赘述。
应理解，图10示例的装置1000的结构仅为一种可能的形态，而不应对本申请实施例构成任何限定。本申请并不排除未来可能出现的其他形态的网络设备结构的可能。
应理解，根据本申请实施例的终端设备1000可对应于前述方法实施例的传输控制信息的第终端设备，并且终端设备1000中的各个模块的上述和其它管理操作和/或功能分别为了实现前述各个方法的相应步骤，因此也可以实现前述方法实施例中的有益效果。
还应理解，本申请实施例中的处理模块可以由处理器实现，收发模块可以由收发器实现。
根据前述方法，图11为本申请实施例提供的寻呼装置1100的示意图。
其中，该装置1100可以为终端设备，也可以为芯片或电路，比如可设置于终端设备的芯片或电路。
该装置1100可以包括处理器1110，可选地，还可以包括存储单元1120。该存储单元1120用于存储指令。
一种可能的方式中，该处理器1110用于执行该存储单元1120存储的指令，以使装置1100实现如上述方法中终端设备(例如，终端设备120或终端设备230)，执行的步骤。
进一步的，该装置1100还可以包括输入口1130(即，寻呼单元的一例)和输出口114(即，收发单元的另一例)。进一步的，该处理器1110、存储单元1120、输入口1130和输出口1140可以通过内部连接通路互相寻呼，传递控制和/或数据信号。该存储单元1120用于存储计算机程序，该处理器1110可以用于从该存储单元1120中调用并运行该计算计程序，完成上述方法中终端设备的步骤。该存储单元1120可以集成在处理器1110中，也可以与处理器1110分开设置。
可选地，一种可能的方式中，该输入口1130可以为接收器，该输出口1140为发送器。其中，接收器和发送器可以为相同或者不同的物理实体。为相同的物理实体时，可以统称为收发器。
可选地，一种可能的方式中，该输入口1130为输入接口，该输出口1140为输出接口。
作为一种实现方式，输入口1130和输出口1140的功能可以考虑通过收发电路或者收发的专用芯片实现。处理器1110可以考虑通过专用处理芯片、处理电路、处理器或者通用芯片实现。
作为另一种实现方式，可以考虑使用通用计算机的方式来实现本申请实施例提供的终端设备。即将实现处理器1110、输入口1130和输出口1140功能的程序代码存储在存储单元1120中，通用处理器通过执行存储单元1120中的代码来实现处理器1110、输入口1130和输出口1140的功能。
当该装置1100为终端设备时，该终端设备包括处理器、存储单元、射频电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对寻呼协议以及寻呼数据进行处理，以及对终端设备进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据等。存储单元主要用于存储软件程序和数据。射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置，例如触摸屏、显示屏，键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。需要说明的是，有些种类的终端设备可以不具有输入输出装置。当需要发送数据时，处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后，输出基带信号至射频电路，射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时，射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号，将射频信号转换为基带信号，并将基带信号输出至处理器，处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。为便于说明。存储单元也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储单元可以是独立于处理器设置，也可以是与处理器集成在一起，本申请实施例对此不做限制。此情况下，可以将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备的处理器1110。处理器1110也可以称为处理器，处理单板，处理模块、处理装置等。并且，此情况下，可以将接收机、接收器、或接收电路等视为输入口1130。可以将发射机、发射器或者发射电路等视为输出口1140。
当该寻呼装置1100为芯片时，该芯片包括收发电路和处理电路。其中，收发电路可以是输入/输出电路或寻呼接口；处理电路可以为该芯片上集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。输入电路可以为输入管脚，输出电路可以为输出管脚，处理电路可以为晶体管、门电路、触发器和各种逻辑电路等。输入电路所接收的输入的信号可以是但不限于接收器接收并输入的，输出电路所输出的信号可以是但不限于输出给发射器并由发射器发射的，且输入电路和输出电路可以是不同的电路，也可以是同一电路，这种情况下该电路在不同的时刻分别用作输入电路和输出电路。
在一种实现方式中，输入口1130用于从网络设备接收第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于确定第一寻呼的类型,该第一寻呼的类型包括：非重复寻呼或重复寻呼。
处理器1110用于根据该第一指示信息确定第一寻呼的类型。
处理器1110用于根据该第一寻呼的类型确定接收或不接收该第一寻呼。
可选地，该处理器1110具体用于：
如果该第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼，接收该第一寻呼；或者，
如果该第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，不接收该第一寻呼。
可选地，该处理器1110具体用于：
如果该第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，且在该第一寻呼之前未接收过寻呼，接收该第一寻呼；或者，
如果该第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，且在该第一寻呼之前已接收过寻呼，不接收该第一寻呼。
可选地，该处理器1110具体用于：
如果第一寻呼的第一指示信息与上一次接收的第一指示信息不同，确定该第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼，接收该第一寻呼；或者，
如果第一寻呼的第一指示信息与上一次接收的第一指示信息相同，确定该第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，不接收该第一寻呼。
可选地，结合唤醒信号机制WUS判断是否接收寻呼。
输入口1130用于从网络设备接收唤醒信号WUS，该唤醒信号WUS用于确定接收或不接收该第一寻呼。
该处理单元1110用于根据该唤醒信号WUS和该第一指示信息确定接收或不接收该第一寻呼。
该处理单元1110具体用于：
如果WUS指示终端设备需要接收第一寻呼，若第一寻呼为新发送的寻呼，则终端设备接收第一寻呼；若第一寻呼为重复发送的寻呼，则终端设备在未接收过该寻呼的情况下接收第一寻呼；
如果WUS指示终端设备不需要接收第一寻呼，则终端设备直接不接收第一寻呼；或者，接收第一寻呼。
在另一种实现方式中，输出口1140用于向网络设备发送该第一信息。其中，该小区信息包括但不限于小区标识信息，终端设备在小区的停留概率信息，具体时间信息等。
该处理单元1110用于确定第一信息，该第一信息是终端设备在驻留/访问的一个或多个小区上的停留概率信息，该第一信息用于确定终端设备的寻呼范围，该寻呼范围用于网络设备发送寻呼。
输入口1130用于接收网络设备发送的寻呼，该寻呼用于寻呼该终端设备。
可选地，该输出口1140具体用于：发送该第一信息，包括：
向核心网和/或无线接入网发送该第一信息。
在另一种实现方式中，输入口1130用于接收网络设备发送的第一分组参数(例如，组号范围、组号偏移量等)，该第一分组参数用于确定无线资源控制空闲态RRC_IDLE终端设备和无线资源控制非激活态RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的分组组号。
具体地，输入口1130具体用于：
从广播消息中接收该第一分组参数；或者，
从无线资源控制RRC消息中接收该第一分组参数。
该处理单元1110用于根据该第一分组参数确定该分组组号，该分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
输入口1130还用于接收该寻呼，该寻呼用于寻呼该终端设备。
该处理单元1110用于RRC_IDLE终端设备根据该第一组号范围或该第一组号偏移量确定该分组组号；或者，RRC_INACTIVE终端设备根据该第二组号范围或第二该组号偏移量确定该分组组号。
可选地，该处理单元1110用于：
RRC_IDLE终端设备根据该第一组号范围或该第一组号偏移量确定该分组组号；或者，
RRC_INACTIVE终端设备根据该第二组号范围或第二该组号偏移量确定该分组组号。
可选地，该处理单元1110具体用于：
如果基于UE标识信息分组或者UE的被寻呼概率分组等，则终端设备根据组号范围确定自己的分组组号。例如，idle UE的组号范围为0～M，则idle UE最终使用的组号需要 属于0～M范围内。
如果基于UE标识信息分组或者UE的被寻呼概率分组等，则终端设备根据组号偏移量确定自己的分组组号。例如，idle UE的组号偏移量为W，则终端设备计算最终使用的组号时需要使用组号偏移量。
如果针对RRC_INACTIVE UE，与上述方式1和方式2的对应方法相同，则终端设备确定自己的组号位于组号范围内，或者使用组号偏移量确定自己的组号。
在另一种实现方式中，输出口1140用于向网络设备发送第二分组参数，例如，终端设备将自己的业务需求等级发送给网络设备。
输入口1130用于接收接入网设备发送的第四分组参数，该第四分组参数用于终端设备确定分组组号。
可选地，输入口1130具体用于：
从广播消息中接收接入网设备发送的该第一分组参数；或者，
从无线资源控制RRC消息中接收接入网设备发送的该第一分组参数。
该处理单元1110用于根据该第二分组参数和该第四分组参数确定分组组号。
可选地，如果核心网设备不接收终端设备发送的第二分组参数，
输出口1140用于发送更新后的第二分组参数；或者，
输入口1130用于接收核心网设备发送的更新后的第二分组参数，该第二分组参数用于终端设备确定分组组号。
可选地，输入口1130还用于接收核心网设备发送的第二分组参数，该第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
其中，以上列举的装置1100中各模块或单元的功能和动作仅为示例性说明，当该装置1100配置在或本身即为终端设备时，装置1100中各模块或单元可以用于执行上述方法中终端设备所执行的各动作或处理过程。这里，为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。
该装置1100所涉及的与本申请实施例提供的技术方案相关的概念，解释和详细说明及其他步骤请参见前述方法或其他实施例中关于这些内容的描述，此处不做赘述。
应理解，图11示例的装置1100的结构仅为一种可能的形态，而不应对本申请实施例构成任何限定。本申请并不排除未来可能出现的其他形态的终端设备的可能。
应理解，根据本申请实施例的网络设备1100可对应于前述方法实施例的传输控制信息的第网络设备，并且网络设备1100中的各个模块的上述和其它管理操作和/或功能分别为了实现前述各个方法的相应步骤，因此也可以实现前述方法实施例中的有益效果。
还应理解，本申请实施例中的处理模块可以由处理器实现，收发模块可以由收发器实现。
图12是根据本申请实施例提供的终端设备1200的结构框图。图12所示的终端设备1200包括：处理器1210、存储器1220和收发器1230。
处理器1210、存储器1220和收发器1230之间通过内部连接通路互相通信，传递控制和/或数据信号。在一个可能的设计中，处理器1210、存储器1220和收发器1230可以通过芯片实现。该存储器1220可以存储程序代码，处理器1210调用存储器1220存储的程序代码，以实现该终端设备的相应功能。
所述处理器1210用于根据所述第一指示信息确定第一寻呼的类型。
所述处理器1210用于根据所述第一分组参数确定所述分组组号，所述分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
所述处理器1210用于RRC_IDLE终端设备根据所述第一组号范围或所述第一组号偏移量确定所述分组组号；或者，RRC_INACTIVE终端设备根据所述第二组号范围或第二所述组号偏移量确定所述分组组号。
所述处理器1210用于根据所述第一寻呼的类型确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼。
所述处理器1210具体用于：
如果WUS指示终端设备需要接收第一寻呼，若第一寻呼为新发送的寻呼，则终端设备接收第一寻呼；若第一寻呼为重复发送的寻呼，则终端设备在未接收过该寻呼的情况下接收第一寻呼；
如果WUS指示终端设备不需要接收第一寻呼，则终端设备直接不接收第一寻呼；或者，接收第一寻呼。
通过所述收发器1230从网络设备接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于确定第一寻呼的类型,所述第一寻呼的类型包括：非重复寻呼或重复寻呼。
通过所述收发器1230从网络设备接收唤醒信号WUS，所述唤醒信号WUS用于确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼。
通过所述收发器1230向网络设备发送该第一信息。其中，所述小区信息包括但不限于小区标识信息，终端设备在小区的停留概率信息，具体时间信息等。
通过所述收发器1230接收网络设备发送的第一分组参数(例如，组号范围、组号偏移量等)，所述第一分组参数用于确定无线资源控制空闲态RRC_IDLE终端设备和无线资源控制非激活态RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的分组组号。
终端设备1200中处理器1210、存储器1220和收发器1230在本申请实施例中其他具体的实现方式在这里就不再赘述。
可以理解的是，尽管并未示出，终端设备1200还可以包括其他装置，例如输入装置、输出装置、电池等。
可选地，在一些实施例中，存储器1220可以存储用于执行前述方法中终端设备执行的方法的部分或全部指令。处理器1210可以执行存储器1220中存储的指令结合其他硬件(例如收发器1230)完成前述方法中终端设备执行的步骤，具体工作过程和有益效果可以参见前述方法实施例中的描述。
图13是根据本申请实施例提供的网络设备1300的结构框图。图13所示的网络设备1300包括：处理器1310、存储器1320和收发器1330。
处理器1310、存储器1320和收发器1330之间通过内部连接通路互相通信，传递控制和/或数据信号。在一个可能的设计中，处理器1310、存储器1320和收发器1330可以通过芯片实现。该存储器1320可以存储程序代码，处理器1310调用存储器1320存储的程序代码，以实现该网络设备的相应功能。
所述处理器1310用于：
如果核心网接收所述第一信息，且所述核心网发送所述寻呼，所述核心网根据所述第一信息确定寻呼范围；或者，
如果接入网接收所述第一信息且所述接入网发送所述寻呼，所述接入网根据所述第一 信息确定寻呼范围；或者，
如果核心网接收所述第一信息，且接入网发送所述寻呼，所述核心网向所述终端设备的上一个服务基站last serving gNB发送所述终端设备数据和所述第一信息，所述上一个服务基站last serving gNB根据所述第一信息确定寻呼范围。
所述处理器1310用于确定第二分组参数，所述第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
所述处理器1310用于根据所述第一信息确定终端设备的寻呼范围。
所述处理器1310用于根据所述第三分组参数确定所述第四分组参数。
通过所述收发器1330发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于确定第一寻呼的类型，所述第一寻呼的类型包括：非重复寻呼或重复寻呼。
通过所述收发器1330接收第一信息，所述第一信息是终端设备在驻留/访问的一个或多个小区上的停留概率信息，所述第一信息用于确定终端设备的寻呼范围，所述寻呼范围用于网络设备发送寻呼。
通过所述收发器1330发送第一分组参数，所述第一分组参数用于确定无线资源控制空闲态RRC_IDLE终端设备和无线资源控制非激活态RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的分组组号，所述分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
通过所述收发器1330广播所述第一分组参数；或者，通过无线资源控制RRC消息发送所述第一分组参数。
通过所述收发器1330接收终端设备发送的第二分组参数，例如，终端设备的业务需求等级，所述第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
通过所述收发器1330向接入网设备发送第二分组参数，该第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
通过所述收发器1330向接入网设备发送第三分组参数，该第三分组参数用于确定第四分组参数，该第四分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号，该分组组号用于接入网设备发送寻呼。
网络设备1300中处理器1310、存储器1320和收发器1330在本申请实施例中其他具体的实现方式在这里就不再赘述。
可以理解的是，尽管并未示出，网络设备1300还可以包括其他装置，例如输入装置、输出装置、电池等。
可选地，在一些实施例中，存储器1320可以存储用于执行前述方法中网络设备执行的方法的部分或全部指令。处理器1310可以执行存储器1320中存储的指令结合其他硬件(例如收发器1330)完成前述方法中网络设备执行的步骤，具体工作过程和有益效果可以参见前述方法实施例中的描述。
可以理解的是，当本申请的实施例应用于网络设备芯片时，该网络设备芯片实现上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。该网络设备芯片向网络设备中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)接收上述上行共享信道和上行数据。该上行共享信道和下行数据是终端设备发送给网络设备的。
当本申请的实施例应用于终端设备芯片时，该终端设备芯片实现上述方法实施例中终端设备的功能。该终端设备芯片从终端设备中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)发送上述 上行共享信道和下行数据。
上述本申请实施例揭示的方法可以应用于处理器中，或者由处理器实现。处理器可能是一种集成电路芯片，具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中，上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)，专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)，现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件，分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件，分立硬件组件，还可以是系统芯片(system on chip,SoC)，还可以是中央处理器(central processor unit,CPU)，还可以是网络处理器(network processor,NP)，还可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor,DSP)，还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit,MCU)，还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device,PLD)或其他集成芯片。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。
结合本申请实施例公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成，或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、闪存、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器，处理器读取存储器中的指令，结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。
还应理解，本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(RAM,random access memory)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的随机存取存储器(RAM,random access memory)可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储单元(DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。
上述实施例，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或其他任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，上述实施例可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令或计算机程序。在计算机上加载或执行所述计算机指令或计算机程序时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以为通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一 个或多个可用介质集合的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，DVD)、或者半导体介质。半导体介质可以是固态硬盘。
应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
应理解，在本申请实施例中，术语“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系。例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。另外，本文中字符“/”，一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
还应理解，本申请实施例中的“第一”和“第二”仅为了区分，不应对本申请构成任何限定。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或寻呼连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或寻呼连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储单元、随机存取存储单元、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (73)

  1. 一种寻呼方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于确定第一寻呼的类型,所述第一寻呼的类型包括：非重复寻呼或重复寻呼；
    根据所述第一指示信息确定第一寻呼的类型；
    根据所述第一寻呼的类型确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述重复寻呼满足：
    如果第一寻呼的消息内容与第二寻呼的消息内容相同，所述第一寻呼为重复寻呼，所述第二寻呼是在所述第一寻呼之前发送的寻呼；或者，
    如果第一寻呼的终端设备属于第二寻呼的终端设备，所述第一寻呼为重复寻呼，所述第二寻呼是在所述第一寻呼之前发送的寻呼。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述第一寻呼的类型确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼，包括：
    如果所述第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼，接收所述第一寻呼；或者，
    如果所述第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，不接收所述第一寻呼。
  4. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述第一寻呼的类型确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼，还包括：
    如果所述第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，且在所述第一寻呼之前未接收过寻呼，接收所述第一寻呼；或者，
    如果所述第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，且在所述第一寻呼之前已接收过寻呼，不接收所述第一寻呼。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述在所述第一寻呼之前未接收过寻呼，包括：
    在所述第一寻呼之前的第一时间内，和/或在当前驻留的服务小区上未接收过寻呼；或者，
    在所述第一寻呼之前未接收过与所述第一寻呼相同的寻呼。
  6. 根据权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述在所述第一寻呼之前已接收过寻呼，包括：
    在所述第一寻呼之前的第一时间内，和/或在当前驻留的服务小区上已接收过寻呼；或者，
    在所述第一寻呼之前已接收过与所述第一寻呼相同的寻呼。
  7. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述第一寻呼类型确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼，还包括：
    如果第一寻呼的第一指示信息与上一次接收的第一指示信息不同，确定所述第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼，接收所述第一寻呼；或者，
    如果第一寻呼的第一指示信息与上一次接收的第一指示信息相同，确定所述第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，不接收所述第一寻呼。
  8. 根据权利要求1-7中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收唤醒信号WUS，所述唤醒信号WUS用于确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼；
    根据所述唤醒信号WUS和所述第一指示信息确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼。
  9. 一种寻呼方法，其特征在于，包括：
    发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于确定第一寻呼的类型，所述第一寻呼的类型包括：非重复寻呼或重复寻呼。
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述重复寻呼满足：
    如果第一寻呼的消息内容与第二寻呼的消息内容相同，所述第一寻呼为重复寻呼，所述第二寻呼是在所述第一寻呼之前发送的寻呼；或者，
    如果第一寻呼的终端设备属于第二寻呼的终端设备，所述第一寻呼为重复寻呼，所述第二寻呼是在所述第一寻呼之前发送的寻呼。
  11. 根据权利要求9或10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述发送第一指示信息，包括：
    如果所述第一寻呼类型为非重复寻呼，发送所述第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于确定所述第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼；或者，
    如果所述第一寻呼类型为重复寻呼，发送所述第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于确定所述第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼。
  12. 根据权利要求9或10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述发送第一指示信息，还包括：
    如果多个寻呼为相同的寻呼，发送相同的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于确定第一寻呼的类型，所述第一寻呼是多个寻呼中的任意一个寻呼。
  13. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    确定第一信息，所述第一信息包括：终端设备驻留/访问过的一个或多个小区标识信息和第二信息，所述第二信息是终端设备在驻留/访问的一个或多个小区上的停留概率信息；
    发送所述第一信息。
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息，还包括：
    在第一时段内，所述终端设备在一个或多个小区上的停留概率信息；或者，
    在第一小区上，所述终端设备在多个时段内的停留概率信息。
  15. 根据权利要求13或14所述的方法，其特征在于，所述发送所述第一信息，包括：
    向核心网和/或无线接入网发送所述第一信息。
  16. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接收第一信息，所述第一信息包括：终端设备驻留/访问过的一个或多个小区标识信息和第二信息，所述第二信息是终端设备在驻留/访问的一个或多个小区上的停留概率信息，所述第一信息用于网络设备确定寻呼范围；
    根据所述第一信息确定寻呼范围。
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息，还包括：
    在第一时段内，所述终端设备在一个或多个小区上的停留概率信息；或者，
    在第一小区上，所述终端设备在多个时段内的停留概率信息。
  18. 根据权利要求16或17所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述第一信息确定寻呼范围，包括：
    如果核心网接收所述第一信息，且所述核心网发送寻呼，所述核心网根据所述第一信息确定寻呼范围；或者，
    如果接入网接收所述第一信息且所述接入网发送寻呼，所述接入网根据所述第一信息确定寻呼范围；或者，
    如果核心网接收所述第一信息，且接入网发送寻呼，所述核心网向所述终端设备的上一个服务基站last serving gNB发送所述终端设备数据和所述第一信息，所述上一个服务基站根据所述第一信息确定寻呼范围。
  19. 一种用于寻呼的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接收第一分组参数，所述第一分组参数用于确定无线资源控制空闲态RRC_IDLE终端设备和/或无线资源控制非激活态RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的分组组号；
    根据所述第一分组参数确定所述分组组号，所述分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一分组参数包括：组号范围或组号偏移量；
    所述组号范围包括第一组号范围和/或第二组号范围，所述第一组号范围是RRC_IDLE终端设备的组号范围，所述第二组号范围是RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的组号范围；
    所述组号偏移量包括第一组号偏移量和/或第二组号偏移量，所述第一组号偏移量是RRC_IDLE终端设备的组号偏移量，所述第二组号偏移量是RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的组号偏移量。
  21. 根据权利要求19或20所述的方法，其特征在于，所述接收第一分组参数，包括：
    从广播消息中接收所述第一分组参数；或者，
    从无线资源控制RRC消息中接收所述第一分组参数。
  22. 根据权利要求19-21中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述第一分组参数确定所述终端设备的分组组号，包括：
    RRC_IDLE终端设备根据所述第一组号范围或所述第一组号偏移量确定所述分组组号；或者，
    RRC_INACTIVE终端设备根据所述第二组号范围或第二所述组号偏移量确定所述分组组号。
  23. 一种用于寻呼的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    发送第一分组参数，所述第一分组参数用于确定无线资源控制空闲态RRC_IDLE终端设备和/或无线资源控制非激活态RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的分组组号，所述分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一分组参数包括：组号范围或组号偏移量；
    所述组号范围包括第一组号范围和第二组号范围，所述第一组号范围是RRC_IDLE终端设备的组号范围，所述第二组号范围是RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的组号范围；
    所述组号偏移量包括第一组号偏移量和第二组号偏移量，所述第一组号偏移量是RRC_IDLE终端设备的组号偏移量，所述第二组号偏移量是RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的组号偏移量。
  25. 根据权利要求23或24所述的方法，其特征在于，所述发送所述第一分组参数， 包括：
    广播所述第一分组参数；或者，
    通过无线资源控制RRC消息发送所述第一分组参数。
  26. 一种用于寻呼的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    发送第二分组参数，所述第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号；
    接收第四分组参数，所述第四分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号；
    根据所述第二分组参数和所述第四分组参数确定终端设备的分组组号，所述分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二分组参数是根据所述终端设备的业务的服务质量参数，和/或终端设备的业务类型，和/或终端设备的移动性状态或速度确定的。
  28. 根据权利要求26或27所述的方法，其特征在于，所述接收第四分组参数，包括：
    从广播消息中接收所述第四分组参数；或者，
    从无线资源控制RRC消息中接收所述第四分组参数。
  29. 根据权利要求26-28中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收更新后的第二分组参数，所述第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
  30. 一种用于寻呼的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接收第二分组参数，所述第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号；
    向接入网设备发送所述第二分组参数和第三分组参数，所述第三分组参数用于确定第四分组参数。
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二分组参数是根据所述终端设备的业务的服务质量参数，和/或终端设备的业务类型，和/或终端设备的移动性状态或速度确定的。
  32. 根据权利要求30或31所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    发送更新后的第二分组参数，所述第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
  33. 一种用于寻呼的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接收第二分组参数，所述第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号；
    接收第三分组参数，所述第三分组参数用于确定第四分组参数；
    根据所述第三分组参数确定所述第四分组参数；
    发送所述第四分组参数，所述第四分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号；
    根据第二分组参数和第四分组参数确定终端设备的分组组号，所述分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二分组参数是根据所述终端设备的业务的服务质量参数，和/或终端设备的业务类型，和/或终端设备的移动性状态或速度确定的。
  35. 根据权利要求33或34所述的方法，其特征在于，所述发送所述第四分组参数，包括：
    广播所述第四分组参数；或者，
    通过无线资源控制RRC消息发送所述第四分组参数。
  36. 一种寻呼装置，其特征在于，包括：
    收发单元，用于接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于确定第一寻呼的类型,所述第一寻呼的类型包括：非重复寻呼或重复寻呼；
    处理单元，用于根据所述第一指示信息确定第一寻呼的类型；
    处理单元，用于根据所述第一寻呼的类型确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼。
  37. 根据权利要求36所述的装置，其特征在于，所述重复寻呼满足：
    如果第一寻呼的消息内容与第二寻呼的消息内容相同，所述第一寻呼为重复寻呼，所述第二寻呼是在所述第一寻呼之前发送的寻呼；或者，
    如果第一寻呼的终端设备属于第二寻呼的终端设备，所述第一寻呼为重复寻呼，所述第二寻呼是在所述第一寻呼之前发送的寻呼。
  38. 根据权利要求36或37所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元用于根据所述第一寻呼的类型确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼，包括：
    如果所述第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼，接收所述第一寻呼；或者，
    如果所述第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，不接收所述第一寻呼。
  39. 根据权利要求36或37所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元用于根据所述第一寻呼的类型确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼，还包括：
    如果所述第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，且在所述第一寻呼之前未接收过寻呼，接收所述第一寻呼；或者，
    如果所述第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，且在所述第一寻呼之前已接收过寻呼，不接收所述第一寻呼。
  40. 根据权利要求39所述的装置，其特征在于，所述在所述第一寻呼之前未接收过寻呼，包括：
    在所述第一寻呼之前的第一时间内，和/或在当前驻留的服务小区上未接收过寻呼；或者，
    在所述第一寻呼之前未接收过与所述第一寻呼相同的寻呼。
  41. 根据权利要求39所述的装置，其特征在于，所述在所述第一寻呼之前已接收过寻呼，包括：
    在所述第一寻呼之前的第一时间内，和/或在当前驻留的服务小区上已接收过寻呼；或者，
    在所述第一寻呼之前已接收过与所述第一寻呼相同的寻呼。
  42. 根据权利要求36或37所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元用于根据所述第一寻呼类型确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼，还包括：
    如果第一寻呼的第一指示信息与上一次接收的第一指示信息不同，确定所述第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼，接收所述第一寻呼；或者，
    如果第一寻呼的第一指示信息与上一次接收的第一指示信息相同，确定所述第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼，不接收所述第一寻呼。
  43. 根据权利要求36-42中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述装置还包括：
    收发单元，用于接收唤醒信号WUS，所述唤醒信号WUS用于确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼；
    处理单元，用于根据所述唤醒信号WUS和所述第一指示信息确定接收或不接收所述第一寻呼。
  44. 一种寻呼装置，其特征在于，包括：
    收发单元，用于发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于确定第一寻呼的类型，所述第一寻呼的类型包括：非重复寻呼或重复寻呼。
  45. 根据权利要求44所述的装置，其特征在于，所述重复寻呼满足：
    如果第一寻呼的消息内容与第二寻呼的消息内容相同，所述第一寻呼为重复寻呼，所述第二寻呼是在所述第一寻呼之前发送的寻呼；或者，
    如果第一寻呼的终端设备属于第二寻呼的终端设备，所述第一寻呼为重复寻呼，所述第二寻呼是在所述第一寻呼之前发送的寻呼。
  46. 根据权利要求44或45所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元用于发送第一指示信息，包括：
    如果所述第一寻呼类型为非重复寻呼，发送所述第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于确定所述第一寻呼的类型为非重复寻呼；或者，
    如果所述第一寻呼类型为重复寻呼，发送所述第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于确定所述第一寻呼的类型为重复寻呼。
  47. 根据权利要求44或45所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元用于发送第一指示信息，还包括：
    如果多个寻呼为相同的寻呼，发送相同的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于确定第一寻呼的类型，所述第一寻呼是多个寻呼中的任意一个寻呼。
  48. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    处理单元，用于确定第一信息，所述第一信息包括：终端设备驻留/访问过的一个或多个小区标识信息和第二信息，所述第二信息是终端设备在驻留/访问的一个或多个小区上的停留概率信息；
    收发单元，用于发送所述第一信息。
  49. 根据权利要求48所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一信息，还包括：
    在第一时段内，所述终端设备在一个或多个小区上的停留概率信息；或者，
    在第一小区上，所述终端设备在多个时段内的停留概率信息。
  50. 根据权利要求48或49所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元用于发送所述第一信息，包括：
    向核心网和/或无线接入网发送所述第一信息。
  51. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    收发单元，用于接收第一信息，所述第一信息包括：终端设备驻留/访问过的一个或多个小区标识信息和第二信息，所述第二信息是终端设备在驻留/访问的一个或多个小区上的停留概率信息，所述第一信息用于网络设备确定寻呼范围；
    处理单元，用于根据所述第一信息确定寻呼范围。
  52. 根据权利要求51所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一信息，还包括：
    在第一时段内，所述终端设备在一个或多个小区上的停留概率信息；或者，
    在第一小区上，所述终端设备在多个时段内的停留概率信息。
  53. 根据权利要求51或52所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元用于根据所述第一信息确定寻呼范围，包括：
    如果核心网接收所述第一信息，且所述核心网发送寻呼，所述核心网根据所述第一信息确定寻呼范围；或者，
    如果接入网接收所述第一信息且所述接入网发送寻呼，所述接入网根据所述第一信息确定寻呼范围；或者，
    如果核心网接收所述第一信息，且接入网发送寻呼，所述核心网向所述终端设备的上一个服务基站last serving gNB发送所述终端设备数据和所述第一信息，所述上一个服务基站根据所述第一信息确定寻呼范围。
  54. 一种用于寻呼的装置，其特征在于，包括：
    收发单元，用于接收第一分组参数，所述第一分组参数用于确定无线资源控制空闲态RRC_IDLE终端设备和/或无线资源控制非激活态RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的分组组号；
    处理单元，用于根据所述第一分组参数确定所述分组组号，所述分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
  55. 根据权利要求54所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一分组参数包括：组号范围或组号偏移量；
    所述组号范围包括第一组号范围和/或第二组号范围，所述第一组号范围是RRC_IDLE终端设备的组号范围，所述第二组号范围是RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的组号范围；
    所述组号偏移量包括第一组号偏移量和/或第二组号偏移量，所述第一组号偏移量是RRC_IDLE终端设备的组号偏移量，所述第二组号偏移量是RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的组号偏移量。
  56. 根据权利要求54或55所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元用于接收第一分组参数，包括：
    从广播消息中接收所述第一分组参数；或者，
    从无线资源控制RRC消息中接收所述第一分组参数。
  57. 根据权利要求54-56中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元用于根据所述第一分组参数确定所述终端设备的分组组号，包括：
    RRC_IDLE终端设备根据所述第一组号范围或所述第一组号偏移量确定所述分组组号；或者，
    RRC_INACTIVE终端设备根据所述第二组号范围或第二所述组号偏移量确定所述分组组号。
  58. 一种用于寻呼的装置，其特征在于，包括：
    收发单元，用于发送第一分组参数，所述第一分组参数用于确定无线资源控制空闲态RRC_IDLE终端设备和/或无线资源控制非激活态RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的分组组号，所述分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
  59. 根据权利要求58所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一分组参数包括：组号范围或组号偏移量；
    所述组号范围包括第一组号范围和第二组号范围，所述第一组号范围是RRC_IDLE终端设备的组号范围，所述第二组号范围是RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的组号范围；
    所述组号偏移量包括第一组号偏移量和第二组号偏移量，所述第一组号偏移量是RRC_IDLE终端设备的组号偏移量，所述第二组号偏移量是RRC_INACTIVE终端设备的组号偏移量。
  60. 根据权利要求58或59所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元用于发送所述第一分组参数，包括：
    广播所述第一分组参数；或者，
    通过无线资源控制RRC消息发送所述第一分组参数。
  61. 一种用于寻呼的装置，其特征在于，包括：
    收发单元，用于发送第二分组参数，所述第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号；
    收发单元，用于接收第四分组参数，所述第四分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号；
    处理单元，用于根据所述第二分组参数和所述第四分组参数确定终端设备的分组组号，所述分组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
  62. 根据权利要求61所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第二分组参数是根据所述终端设备的业务的服务质量参数，和/或终端设备的业务类型，和/或终端设备的移动性状态或速度确定的。
  63. 根据权利要求61或62所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元用于接收第四分组参数，包括：
    从广播消息中接收所述第四分组参数；或者，
    从无线资源控制RRC消息中接收所述第四分组参数。
  64. 根据权利要求61-63中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述装置还包括：
    收发单元，用于接收更新后的第二分组参数，所述第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
  65. 一种用于寻呼的装置，其特征在于，包括：
    收发单元，用于接收第二分组参数，所述第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号；
    收发单元，用于向接入网设备发送所述第二分组参数和第三分组参数，所述第三分组参数用于确定第四分组参数。
  66. 根据权利要求65所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第二分组参数是根据所述终端设备的业务的服务质量参数，和/或终端设备的业务类型，和/或终端设备的移动性状态或速度确定的。
  67. 根据权利要求65或66所述的装置，其特征在于，所述装置还包括：
    收发单元，用于发送更新后的第二分组参数，所述第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号。
  68. 一种用于寻呼的装置，其特征在于，包括：
    收发单元，用于接收第二分组参数，所述第二分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号；
    收发单元，用于接收第三分组参数，所述第三分组参数用于确定第四分组参数；
    处理单元，用于根据所述第三分组参数确定所述第四分组参数；
    收发单元，用于发送所述第四分组参数，所述第四分组参数用于确定终端设备的分组组号；
    处理单元，用于根据第二分组参数和第四分组参数确定终端设备的分组组号，所述分 组组号用于网络设备发送寻呼。
  69. 根据权利要求68所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第二分组参数是根据所述终端设备的业务的服务质量参数，和/或终端设备的业务类型，和/或终端设备的移动性状态或速度确定的。
  70. 根据权利要求68或69所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元用于发送所述第四分组参数，包括：
    广播所述第四分组参数；或者，
    通过无线资源控制RRC消息发送所述第四分组参数。
  71. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    处理器，用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序，以使得所述通信装置执行权利要求1至35中任一项所述的通信方法。
  72. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序，当所述计算机程序运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至35中任意一项所述的方法。
  73. 一种芯片系统，其特征在于，包括：处理器，用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序，使得安装有所述芯片系统的寻呼设备执行如权利要求1至35中任意一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2020/123444 2020-10-23 2020-10-23 用于寻呼的方法和装置 WO2022082794A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202080101928.2A CN115699925A (zh) 2020-10-23 2020-10-23 用于寻呼的方法和装置
PCT/CN2020/123444 WO2022082794A1 (zh) 2020-10-23 2020-10-23 用于寻呼的方法和装置
EP20958376.4A EP4221382A4 (en) 2020-10-23 2020-10-23 PAGING METHOD AND APPARATUS

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/123444 WO2022082794A1 (zh) 2020-10-23 2020-10-23 用于寻呼的方法和装置

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022082794A1 true WO2022082794A1 (zh) 2022-04-28

Family

ID=81291471

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/123444 WO2022082794A1 (zh) 2020-10-23 2020-10-23 用于寻呼的方法和装置

Country Status (3)

Country Link
EP (1) EP4221382A4 (zh)
CN (1) CN115699925A (zh)
WO (1) WO2022082794A1 (zh)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102026372A (zh) * 2009-09-11 2011-04-20 华为技术有限公司 系统广播消息更新的通知、读取方法及设备
CN103139880A (zh) * 2011-11-29 2013-06-05 鼎桥通信技术有限公司 寻呼方法
CN103687008A (zh) * 2013-12-06 2014-03-26 京信通信系统（中国）有限公司 停止重复寻呼的方法及装置
CN107018496A (zh) * 2017-03-23 2017-08-04 北京小米移动软件有限公司 寻呼方法及装置

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN112135263A (zh) * 2018-05-08 2020-12-25 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 无线通信方法、设备、芯片和系统

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102026372A (zh) * 2009-09-11 2011-04-20 华为技术有限公司 系统广播消息更新的通知、读取方法及设备
CN103139880A (zh) * 2011-11-29 2013-06-05 鼎桥通信技术有限公司 寻呼方法
CN103687008A (zh) * 2013-12-06 2014-03-26 京信通信系统（中国）有限公司 停止重复寻呼的方法及装置
CN107018496A (zh) * 2017-03-23 2017-08-04 北京小米移动软件有限公司 寻呼方法及装置

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP4221382A1 (en) 2023-08-02
CN115699925A (zh) 2023-02-03
EP4221382A4 (en) 2023-11-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022012565A1 (zh) 一种信息发送的方法及装置
WO2021063071A1 (zh) 无线通信方法和装置
JP2022003805A (ja) 無線通信方法及び装置
CN112740763A (zh) 无线通信方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2021128022A1 (zh) 无线通信方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2021062775A1 (zh) 一种寻呼消息的检测方法、装置及通信设备
WO2021042362A1 (zh) 一种无线通信资源分配的方法和装置以及通信设备
WO2021239064A1 (zh) 通信方法及装置
CN113518420A (zh) 通信方法以及通信装置
WO2022082794A1 (zh) 用于寻呼的方法和装置
CN112399618A (zh) 通信方法和装置
US20230389051A1 (en) Methods for inter-ue resource coordination mechanism
WO2022022340A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
WO2021253341A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2022006852A1 (zh) 无线通信方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2021212505A1 (zh) 一种通信方法、装置及系统
WO2022206721A1 (zh) 寻呼方法及其装置
CN113747579A (zh) 传输消息的方法和装置
CN115884408A (zh) 用于信号传输的方法和设备
WO2022151205A1 (zh) 通信的方法及通信装置
WO2023237107A1 (zh) 寻呼方法与装置、终端设备、网络设备和芯片
WO2022193240A1 (zh) 网络选择的方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2023284839A1 (zh) 监听方法与装置、终端和网络设备
WO2023284840A1 (zh) 资源位置确定方法与装置、终端和网络设备
WO2022021293A1 (zh) 信道侦听的方法及设备

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20958376

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020958376

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20230428

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE